OWNER’S MANUAL
LCD TV / LED LCD TV /
PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your set and retain it for future reference.
www.lg.com
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
PREPARATION
LED LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LE4
,
***
32/37/42/47/55LE5 , 32/37/42/47/55LE75 ,
*** **
32/37/42/47/55LE78 , 32/37/42/47/55LE79 ,
**
42/47/55LE8 , 42/47LX6
**
***
***..........................A-1
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LD4
,
***
32/37/42/47/55LD6 , 32/42/47LD7
***
***,
32/37/42LD8
***..............................................A-15
LED LCD TV Models : 47/55LX9
LED LCD TV Models : 42/47LE73
**.............A-36
PLASMA TV Models : 50/60PK5 , 50/60PK7
50/60PK9 , 50/60PX9
*** ***
***..............A-27
,
** ***
..........................A-45
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
-
II
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
LED LCD TV MODELS : 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ,
*** ***
32/37/42/47/55LE75 , 32/37/42/47/55LE78 ,
** **
32/37/42/47/55LE79 , 42/47/55LE8 , 42/47LX6
** *** ***
ACCESSORIES
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please con-
tact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
x 2
ENERGY
AV
M
SA
O
VING
D
E
LIGHT
INPUT
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
TV/
RAD
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
Cable Holder
pqrs
mno
MUTE
P
Q.MENU
INFO
AD
APP/
*
1-screw for stand fixing
3D Glasses
(Only 42/47LX6
Remote Control
Owner’s Manual
Batteries
(AAA)
(Only 32LE4
,
***
)
***
32LE5
)
***
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polish-
ing cloth.
cleansing cloths(mitt)
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LE75
,
**
32/37/42/47/55LE78
32/37/42/47/55LE79
,
**
)
**
Polishing Cloth
Polishing cloth for
use on the screen.
Do not use excessive
force. This may cause
scratching or discoloura-
tion.
Slightly wipe stained spot on the exterior only with
the cleansing cloths(mitt) for the product exterior if
there is stain or fingerprint on surface of the exterior.
For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one
direction after spraying water 1~2 times on cleansing
cloths. Please remove excessive moisture after cleaning.
Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame.
(Only
(Only
(Only 32/37/42/47LE5
,
***
(Only 32LE4
)
(Only 55LE5 , 55LE75
,
**
(Only
42/47/55LE8
***
***
32/37/42/47LE75
32/37/42/47LE78
32/37/42/47LE79
,
,
**
**
**,
37/42LE4
)
32/37/42LE4
)
***
***
)
55LE78 , 55LE79
)
***
**
**
42/47LX6
)
***
x 4
x 4
x 8
x 4
x 4
x 4
(M4 x 24)
x 8
(M4 x 22)
(M4 x 20)
Bolts for stand assembly
(M4 x 24) (M4 x 16)
(M4 x 16)
(M4x16)
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the
electromagnetic wave when connecting
the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core
to the power plug, the better it is.
Ferrite Core
(
This item is not included
Install the power plug closely.
for all models.
)
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
►TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
► Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.
► Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 32/37/42/47/55LE5 , 32/37/42/47/55LE75 ,
*** **
32/37/42/47/55LE78 , 32/37/42/47/55LE79 42/47LX6
** **,
***
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
SPEAKER
Emitter (Only 42/47LX6
)
***
It is the part equipped with the emitter
exchanging signal with 3D glasses.
Please be careful not to block
the screen with objects or people
while watching a 3D Video.
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
OK
INPUT
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
PROGRAMME VOLUME
MENU
POWER
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Only 42/47/55LE8
***
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
SPEAKER
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
VOLUME
MENU
POWER
PROGRAMME
OK
INPUT
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in
the OPTION menu.)
Only 32/37/42LE4
***
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 32/37/42LE4
,
***
32/37/42/47/55LE5
,
***
32/37/42/47/55LE75**,
32/37/42/47/55LE78**,
32/37/42/47/55LE79**,
42/47/55LE8
***
Only 42/47LX6
***
CAUTION
13
13
1
14
14
5
2
3
4
6
6
6
7
► Use a product with the
following thickness for
optimal connection to
HDMI cable (Only HDMI
IN 4) / USB device.
*A 10 mm
11
11
15
7
9
10
11
7
8
12
8
9
1
Power Cord Socket
RGB IN Input
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.184 to 200) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
Connect the output from a PC.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
2
LAN
10
WIRELESS Control
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices con-
nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
a local network.
11
12
Audio/Video Input
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
13
14
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input
USB Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD
SLOT.
6
7
Component Input
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
15 Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
HDMI/DVI IN Input
socket.
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STAND INSTALLATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
4
1
2
Stand Rear
Cover
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
5
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
M4 X 16
M4 X 20
(Only 42/47/55LE8
M4 X 16
(Only
32/37/42/47/55LE5
32/37/42/47/55LE75
32/37/42/47/55LE78
32/37/42/47/55LE79
)
***
M4 X 20
M4 X 22
,
***
(Only 32/37/42/47LE5
32/37/42/47LE75
,
,
,
***
**
**
,
,
(Only 42/47/55LE8
)
(Only 32LE4
)
***
**
***
32/37/42/47LE78
**
**
32/37/42/47LE79 42/47LX6
)
**,
***
42/47LX6
)
***
M4 X 24
M4 X 24
M4 X 16
(Only 37/42LE4
)
***
(Only 55LE5
,
***
Stand Body
Stand Base
(Only
55LE75 , 55LE78
,
**
**
55LE79
32/37/42LE4
)
)
***
**
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
ATTACHING THE TV TO A
DESK
BACK COVER FOR
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Secure the power cord with the Cable
(Only 32LE4
,
32LE5
)
***
***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only
an attached screw.
1
Holder on the TV back cover.
It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
Cable Holder
After connecting the cables as necessary,
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle
the cables.
1-Screw (provided as parts of the product)
Stand
2
Desk
WARNING
Cable Holder
►To prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the machine may cause injury.
SWIVEL STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
A-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■ This feature is not available for all models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
For further information, contact http://www.kens-
ington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
1
1
2
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as note-
book PCs and LCD projectors.
2
NOTE
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
1
2
► The Kensington Security System is an optional
accessory.
► If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
► Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on
the monitor's performance.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
► Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
3
Doing so may produce some temporary distortio
n
effects on the screen.
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
3
NOTE
► When moving the TV undo the cords first.
► Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
► To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
NOTE
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
►Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-
pendicular to the floor.
►Should use a special wall mount, if you want
EARTHING
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
►The surface that wall mount is to be mount-
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-
ural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power
Supply
►LG is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-
tion:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
Circuit
breaker
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-
sonal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Standard
Screw
VESA
(A B)
Model
32LE4
Quantity
*
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-
200 * 100 M4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
***
***
200 * 200
37/42LE4
M6
32LE5
200 * 100
200 * 200
M4
M6
M6
M4
M6
***
37/42/47LE5
***
400 * 400
200 * 100
200 * 200
55LE5***
32LE75 32LE78 32LE79
**, **,
**
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.
37/42/47LE75 37/42/47LE78
**,
**,
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be per-
37/42/47LE79
**
formed by a qualified professional installer.
55LE7
42/47LE8
55LE8
42/47LX6
400 * 400
M6
4
4
4
4
***
***
***
***
200 * 200 M6
M6
M6
400 * 400
200 * 200
A-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS (Only 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ,
***
***
32/37/42/47/55LE75 , 32/37/42/47/55LE78 , 32/37/42/47/55LE79 , 42/47/55LE8 )
** ** ** ***
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
LIGHT
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
ENERGY
SAVING
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
AV MODE
INPUT
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
MENU
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
NetCast
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
APP/
*
A-9
(Only 32/37/42LE48 , 32/37/42/47/55LE58 ,
** **
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32/37/42/47/55LE78 , 42/47/55LE88 )
** **
PREPARATION
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST
Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS (Only 42/47LX6 )
***
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
LIGHT
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
ENERGY
SAVING
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
AV MODE
INPUT
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
MENU
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
NetCast
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
APP/
*
(Only 42/47LX68
)
**
A-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST
Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
L/R SELECT
Use this to view 3D video. (► p.89)
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
3D
Use this to view 3D video. (► p.88)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD TV MODELS : 32/37/42LD4 , 32/37/42/47/55LD6 ,
*** ***
32/42/47LD7
32/37/42LD8
***
***,
ACCESSORIES
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
ENERGY
A
V
MODE
SA
VING
INPUT
TV/
RAD
pqrs
mno
MUTE
P
Q.MENU
INFO
AD
APP/
*
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
Remote Control
Owner’s Manual
Batteries
(AAA)
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polish-
ing cloth.
Ferrite Core
This item is not included
for all models.
Polishing Cloth
Polishing cloth for
use on the screen.
(
Do not use excessive
force. This may cause
scratching or discoloura-
tion.
Power Cord
)
or
x 8
1-screw for stand fixing
(Only 32/37/42LD4
(M4x20)
Bolts for stand assembly
Protection cover
,
***
32/37/42LD6
***,
32/42LD7
,
***
32/37/42LD8
)
***
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power
plug, the better it is.
Install the power plug closely.
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
►TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
► Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.
► Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 32/37/42/47/55LD6
***
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
A-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Only 32/42/47LD7
***
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.)
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
Only 32/37/42LD8
***
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power
Indicator in the OPTION menu.)
Only 32/37/42LD4
***
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in
the OPTION menu.)
A-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Except for
Only
32/37/42LD4
32/37/42LD4
***
***
12
1
12
13
5
2
3
4
6
13
7
7
14
14
15
15
8
9
10
11
7
(Only
32/37/42LD4
10
)
***
8
9
1
2
Power Cord Socket
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.184 to 200) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
WIRELESS Control (Except for 32/37/42LD4
)
***
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices con-
nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
LAN
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
10
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
11
12
13
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD
SLOT.
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
14
15
external device to these jacks.
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
6
7
Component Input
socket.
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
HDMI/DVI IN Input
device to these jacks.
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
STAND INSTALLATION
BACK COVER FOR
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
When assembling the desk type stand, check
whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened
fully, the product can tilt forward after the product
installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive
force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the
tightening part of the bolt.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Connect the cables as necessary.
1
To connect additional equipment, see the
External Equipment Setup section.
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
1
screen from damage.
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
2
Open the Cable Management Clip as
shown.
2
3
Stand Body
Stand Base
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
Cable Management Clip
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
4
NOTE
►Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
the TV.
5
Cover with the TV. (Only 32/42/47LD7
,
***
32/37/42LD8
)
***
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the
TV may be damaged.
Stand Rear
Cover
A-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWIVEL STAND
ATTACHING THE TV TO A
DESK (Only 32/37/42LD4 ,
***
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
32/37/42LD6 , 32/42LD7 , 32/37/42LD8 )
***
***
***
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only
an attached screw.
1-Screw (provided as parts of the product)
Stand
NOT USING THE
DESK-TYPE STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the
protection cover.
Insert the Protection Cover into the TV until
clicking sound.
Desk
WARNING
►To prevent TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the machine may cause injury.
Protection Cover
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■ This feature is not available for all models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
For further information, contact http://www.kens-
ington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
1
1
2
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as note-
book PCs and LCD projectors.
2
NOTE
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
1
► The Kensington Security System is an optional
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
accessory.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
► If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
► Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on
the monitor's performance.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
2
► Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
3
Doing so may produce some temporary distortio
n
effects on the screen.
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
3
NOTE
► When moving the TV undo the cords first.
► Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
► To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
NOTE
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
►Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-
pendicular to the floor.
►Should use a special wall mount, if you want
EARTHING
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
►The surface that wall mount is to be mount-
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-
ural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power
Supply
►LG is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-
tion:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
Circuit
breaker
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-
sonal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
10 cm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be per-
Standard
Screw
VESA
(A B)
Model
32LD4
Quantity
*
200 * 100 M4
200 * 200
M6
200 * 100 M4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
***
***
37/42LD4
32LD6
***
formed by a qualified professional installer.
200 * 200
37/42/47LD6
M6
***
400 * 400
M6
M4
M6
M4
M6
55LD6***
32LD7
***
42/47LD7
32LD8
***
37/42LD8
200 * 100
200 * 200
***
200 * 100
200 * 200
***
A-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
ENERGY
SAVING
AV MODE
INPUT
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
MENU
NetCast
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
OK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
BACK
EXIT Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide.
(
►
p.129)
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
APP/
*
(Only 32/37/42LD48 , 32/37/42/47/55LD68 ,
** **
**, **
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-24
32/42/47LD78 32/37/42LD88 )
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST
Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Q.VIEW
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LED LCD TV MODELS : 47/55LX9
ACCESSORIES
***
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
x 2
3D Glasses
Batteries
(AAA)
Remote Control
Owner’s Manual
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polish-
ing cloth.
Polishing Cloth
Polishing cloth for
use on the screen.
Ferrite Core
Do not use excessive
force. This may cause
scratching or discoloura-
tion.
(
This item is not included
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
for all models.
)
x 4
x 4
x 2
M4x12
M4x22
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
Cable Holder
Stand Rear
Cover
Bolts for stand assembly
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power
plug, the better it is.
Install the power plug closely.
A-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
►TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
► Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.
► Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
SPEAKER
POWER
Emitter
It is the part equipped with the emitter
exchanging signal with 3D glasses.
Please be careful not to block the
screen with objects or people while
watching a 3D Video.
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator
in the OPTION menu.)
A-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
CAUTION
13
14
1
5
2
3
4
6
6
7
► Use a product with the following
thickness for optimal connection
to HDMI cable (Only HDMI IN 4)
/ USB device.
11
*A 10 mm
9
10
11
7
8
12
8
9
1
2
Power Cord Socket
RGB IN Input
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.184 to 200) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
Connect the output from a PC.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
LAN
10
WIRELESS Control
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices con-
nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
a local network.
11
12
Audio/Video Input
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
13
14
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input
USB Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD
SLOT.
6
7
Component Input
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
A-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
STAND INSTALLATION
BACK COVER FOR
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Secure the power cord with the Cable
When assembling the desk type stand, check
whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened
fully, the product can tilt forward after the product
installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive
force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the
tightening part of the bolt.
1
Holder on the TV back cover.
It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Cable Holder
After connecting the cables as necessary,
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle
2
the cables.
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
2
the Stand Base of the TV.
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
Stand Body
M4 X 22
Cable Holder
Stand Base
SWIVEL STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
3
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
M4 X 12
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear
Cover with the TV.
4
Stand Rear
Cover
A-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■ This feature is not available for all models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
For further information, contact http://www.kens-
ington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
1
1
2
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as note-
book PCs and LCD projectors.
2
NOTE
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
1
2
► The Kensington Security System is an optional
accessory.
► If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
► Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on
the monitor's performance.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
► Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
3
Doing so may produce some temporary distortio
n
effects on the screen.
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
3
NOTE
► When moving the TV undo the cords first.
► Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
► To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
NOTE
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
►Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-
pendicular to the floor.
►Should use a special wall mount, if you want
EARTHING
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
►The surface that wall mount is to be mount-
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-
ural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power
Supply
►LG is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-
tion:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
Circuit
breaker
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-
sonal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Standard
Screw
VESA
(A B)
Model
47LX9
Quantity
*
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
200 * 200 M6
M6
400 * 400
4
4
***
55LX9
***
■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be per-
formed by a qualified professional installer.
A-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
LIGHT
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
ENERGY
SAVING
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
AV MODE
INPUT
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
MENU
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
NetCast
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
APP/
*
A-33
(Only 47/55LX98
)
**
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST
Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
L/R SELECT
Use this to view 3D video. (► p.89
)
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
3D
Use this to view 3D video. (► p.88)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
LED LCD TV MODELS : 42/47LE73
ACCESSORIES
**
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
ENERGY
AV
M
SA
O
VING
D
E
LIGHT
INPUT
TV/
RAD
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
Cable Holder
pqrs
mno
MUTE
P
Q.MENU
INFO
AD
APP/
*
Cable Management Clip
Remote Control
Owner’s Manual
Batteries
(AAA)
This item is not included for all models.
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polish-
ing cloth.
x 2
Component gender cable,
AV gender cable
Polishing Cloth
Polishing cloth for
use on the screen.
Do not use excessive
force. This may cause
scratching or discoloura-
tion.
x 3
x 4
(M4 x 20) (M4 x 12)
Bolts for stand assembly
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the
electromagnetic wave when connecting
the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core
to the power plug, the better it is.
Ferrite Core
(
This item is not included
Install the power plug closely.
for all models.
)
A-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
►TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
► Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.
► Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
INPUT
POWER
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture
according to the sur-
rounding conditions.
Power/Standby Indicator
(Can be adjusted using the Power Indicator in
the OPTION menu.)
A-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
13
14
1
CAUTION
5
2
3
4
6
6
11
15
► Use a product with the
following thickness for
optimal connection to
HDMI cable (Only HDMI
IN 4) / USB device.
*A 10 mm
7
9
10
11
7
8
12
8
9
1
2
Power Cord Socket
RGB IN Input
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-
age is indicated on the Specifications page.
(► p.184 to 200) Never attempt to operate
the TV on DC power.
Connect the output from a PC.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
LAN
10
WIRELESS Control
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices con-
nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
a local network.
11
12
Audio/Video Input
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
13
14
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input
USB Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD
SLOT.
6
7
Component Input
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
15 Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone
HDMI/DVI IN Input
socket.
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
A-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STAND INSTALLATION
BACK COVER FOR
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
FOR DESK-TYPE STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check
whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened
fully, the product can tilt forward after the product
installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive
force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the
tightening part of the bolt.
Install the Cable Management Clip as
1
shown.
Carefully place the TV screen side down
on a cushioned surface to protect the
screen from damage.
1
Cable Management Clip
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with
the Stand Base of the TV.
Connect the cables as necessary. To con-
nect additional equipment, see the External
Equipment Setup section.
2
2
At this time, tighten the screws that hold the
Stand Body on.
Stand Body
M4 X 20
FOR WALL MOUNT
Stand Base
After Connecting the cables as necessary,
1
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle
Assemble the TV as shown.
the cables. To connect additional equip-
ment,seetheExternalEquipmentSetup
section.
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
4
Cable Holder
NOTE
►Do not use the Cable Management Clip
to lift the TV.
M4 X 12
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or
the TV may be damaged.
A-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
KENSINGTON SECURITY
SYSTEM
■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■ This feature is not available for all models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
System connector on the back panel. Connect
the Kensington Security System cable as shown
below.
For the detailed installation and use of the
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s
guide provided with the Kensington Security
System.
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
For further information, contact http://www.kens-
ington.com, the internet homepage of the
Kensington
1
1
2
company. Kensington sells security systems for
expensive electronic equipment such as note-
book PCs and LCD projectors.
2
NOTE
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
1
2
► The Kensington Security System is an optional
accessory.
► If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
► Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on
the monitor's performance.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
► Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
3
Doing so may produce some temporary distortio
n
effects on the screen.
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
3
NOTE
► When moving the TV undo the cords first.
► Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
► To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
NOTE
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
►Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-
pendicular to the floor.
►Should use a special wall mount, if you want
EARTHING
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
►The surface that wall mount is to be mount-
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-
ural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
Power
Supply
►LG is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-
tion:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
Circuit
breaker
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-
sonal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Standard
VESA
Model
42/47LE73
Quantity
4
Screw
(A B)
*
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
200 * 200 M6
**
SWIVEL STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be per-
formed by a qualified professional installer.
A-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
LIGHT
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
ENERGY
SAVING
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
AV MODE
INPUT
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
MENU
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
NetCast
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
(Only 42/47LE7380)
APP/
*
A-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST
Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
1
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLASMA TV MODELS : 50/60PK5 , 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 ,
** *** ***
50/60PX9
***
ACCESSORIES
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LIGHT
LIGHT
ENERGY
SAVING
AV MODE
INPUT
ENERGY
SAVING
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/
RAD
TV/
RAD
1.,;@ 2abc 3def
1.,;@ 2abc 3def
4ghi 5jkl
6mno
4ghi 5jkl
6mno
7pqrs 8tuv 9wxyz
7pqrs 8tuv 9wxyz
LIST
LIST
Q.VIEW
Q.VIEW
0
0
Power Cord
MARK
MARK
Nero MediaHome
4 Essentials CD
FAV
FAV
CHAR/NUM
CHAR/NUM
P
A
G
E
P
A
G
E
RATIO
DELETE
P
RATIO
DELETE
P
MUTE
MUTE
MENU
Q.MENU
MENU
Q.MENU
OK
OK
BACK GUIDE EXIT
BACK GUIDE EXIT
x 2
FREEZE
FREEZE
INFO
AD
APP/
INFO
AD
APP/
*
*
Protection
Cover
Owner’s Manual
(Except for 50/60PK9
(Only 50/60PK9
***,
***,
3D Glasses
(Only 50/60PX9
50/60PX9
)
50/60PX9
)
***
***
)
***
Remote Control
Batteries (AAA)
Wireless LAN for
Broadband
/DLNA Adaptor
(Only 50/60PK950,
50/60PK950N, 50/60PK980,
cleansing cloths(mitt)
Cable
Management Clip
(Only 50/60PX9
)
***
50/60PK990 50/60PX950N,
,
Slightly wipe stained spot on the exterior only with the
cleansing cloths(mitt) for the product exterior if there is
stain or fingerprint on surface of the exterior.
50/60PX980, 50/60PX990)
(Only 50/60PK7
,
***
***,
50/60PK9
50/60PX9
)
***
x 2
For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one direction
after spraying water 1~2 times on cleansing cloths. Please
remove excessive moisture after cleaning.
Cable Holder
Excessive moisture may cause water stains on the frame.
This item is not included for all models.
x 3
x 4
x 4
x 4
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface
of the TV with the polishing
M5x14
(Only 50PK5 )
M4x14
cloth.
M4x28
M4x28
(Only 50PK7 , 50PK9
***,
**
***
Polishing Cloth
Polishing cloth for
use on the screen.
50PX9
)
***
Do not use excessive force.
This may cause scratching or
discolouration.
Bolts for stand assembly
Ferrite core can be used to
reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the
power plug.
The closer the location of the
ferrite core to the power plug,
the better it is.
Ferrite core can be used to
reduce the electromagnetic wave
when connecting the LAN cable.
Place the ferrite core far from
TV and wind the LAN cable in
the ferrite core once.
Ferrite Core
Ferrite Core
This item is not
included for all
models.
(
This item is not
(
included for all
models.
)
)
Install the power
plug closely.
A-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NOTE
►TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of
brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
► Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.
► Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 50/60PK5
**
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture accord-
ing to the surrounding
conditions
Power/Standby Indicator
Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The lighting is off while the TV remains on.
•
SPEAKER
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
INPUT
MENU
OK
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
POWER
A-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Only 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 , 50/60PX9
***
***
***
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the
surrounding conditions
Remote Control
Sensor
SPEAKER
Power/Standby Indicator
Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The lighting is off while the TV remains on.
Emitter (Only 50/60PX9
)
***
•
It is the part equipped with the emitter
exchanging signal with 3D glasses.
Please be careful not to
block the screen with objects
or people while watching a
3D Video.
Touch Button
You can use the desired button function by touching.
INPUT
MENU
OK
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
POWER
A-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
8
14
11
8
9
10
7
8
1
2
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. Never
attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
LAN
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to
HDMI cable.
Network connection for AccuWeather,
Picasa, YouTube, etc.
Also used for video, photo and music files on
a local network.
9
RGB IN Input
3
Connect the output from a PC.
WIRELESS Control
Connect the Wireless Ready Dongle to the
TV to control the external input devices con-
nected to Wireless Media Box wirelessly.
10
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
11
12
13
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of
equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT.
6
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
14
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
A-48
device to these jacks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STAND INSTALLATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.
Only 50PK5
**
Only 50PK7 , 50PK9 , 50PX9
*** *** ***
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
Carefully place the TV screen side down on
a cushioned surface to protect the screen
from damage.
1
1
Set the Stand Base on even floor.
Set the Stand Base on even floor.
2
2
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body
with the Stand Base of the TV.
with the Stand Base of the TV.
Stand Body
M5x14
Stand Body
M4x14
Stand Base
Stand Base
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
4
Assemble the parts of the Cable
Management Clip with the Stand Body.
3
4
Stand Body
Cable
Management
Clip
Assemble the TV as shown.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
M4x28
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in
the back of the TV.
5
When assembling the stand,
make sure to distinguish and
assemble the front and rear
side of the stand correctly.
Front
M4x28
A-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
BACK COVER FOR
HOW TO REMOVE THE
CABLE MANAGEMENT
CLIP
WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After connecting the cables as necessary, install
Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables.
Only 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 ,
*** ***
50/60PX9
***
In case of the LAN cable, install as shown
to reduce the electromagnetic wave.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Hold the Cable Management Clip with both
hands and pull it backward as shown.
Cable Holder
Only 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 ,
*** ***
50/60PX9
***
Connect the cables as necessary. To con-
nect additional equipment, see the
External Equipment Setup section.
1
Install the Cable Management Clip into
the TV until clicking sound.
2
NOTE
►Do not use the Cable Management Clip to
lift the TV.
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or
the TV may be damaged.
A-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOT USING THE DESK-
TYPE STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the
protection cover.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION
ADVICE
■ You should purchase necessary components
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on
the market.
■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the
possibility of it falling when pushed.
■ The instructions shown below are a safer way
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.
This will prevent the TV from falling forward
and causing injury. This will also prevent the
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not
climb or hang from the TV.
Insert the Protection
Cover into the TV until
clicking sound.
1
1
Protection Cover
2
(Fix a Guide to the Outsides.)
2
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and
tighten them securely in the upper holes.
1
2
SWIVEL STAND
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20
degrees to suit your viewing position.
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is
mounted on the wall.
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes
horizontal between the wall and the product.
3
NOTE
► When moving the TV undo the cords first.
► Use a platform or cabinet strong and large
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
► To use the TV safely make sure that the height of
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the
same.
A-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as
NOTE
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
►Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-
pendicular to the floor.
►Should use a special wall mount, if you want
EARTHING
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a
separate circuit breaker.
►The surface that wall mount is to be mount-
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-
ural rock, brick and hollow block.
►Installing screw type and length depends on
the wall mount used. Further information,
refer to the instructions included with the
mount.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
►LG is not liable for any accidents or damage
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-
tion:
Power Supply
Circuit breaker
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount
is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-
sonal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation
method.
DESKTOP PEDESTAL
INSTALLATION
10 cm
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10
cm all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
Standard
Screw
VESA
Model
Quantity
(A B)
*
50PK5
M6
M8
M6
M8
M6
M8
M6
M8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
400 400
*
**
■ We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall
60PK5
600 400
**
*
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
■ We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be per-
50PK7
400 400
*
600 400
400 400
*
600 400
400 400
*
600 400
***
***
***
***
***
***
60PK7
50PK9
60PK9
50PX9
60PX9
*
formed by a qualified professional installer.
*
*
A-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
(Only 50/60PK5 , 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 )
** *** ***
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
LIGHT
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
ENERGY
SAVING
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
AV MODE
INPUT
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
MENU
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
NetCast
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
OK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
BACK
EXIT Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide.
(
►
p.129)
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
A-53
APP/
*
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
(Only 50/60PK78 , 50/60PK98 )
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Se*a*rch And Download*.*
PREPARATION
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen. (It doesn't
work at USB Mode and Simplink.)
The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if
no signal is received or no operation is performed
for 5 minutes.
If you keep the screen in Freeze condition, the
residual image can exist.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
1
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►
p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.
(► p.135)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
reverse.
A-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS (Only 50/60PX9 )
***
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
(POWER)
LIGHT
You can turn the light of the remote control button
on or off.
ENERGY
SAVING
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(► p.138)
It helps you select and set images and sounds
when connecting AV devices.(► p.66)
AV MODE
INPUT
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.
(►
p.57)
TV/RAD
MENU
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
(►
p.31)
NetCast
Select the desired NetCast menu source.
(AccuWeather, Picasa, YouTube and etc.)
(►
p.68)
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect
Q. MENU
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/
On, USB Device).
(►
p.30)
THUMBSTICK
(Up/Down/Left/Right)
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and
adjust the system settings to your preference.
OK
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
BACK
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-
active application, EPG or other user interaction
function.
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV
viewing from any menu.
Shows programme guide. (► p.129)
GUIDE
INFO i
AD
Shows the present screen information.
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
APP/
*
A-56
(Only 50/60PX98 )
**
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.
button
Selects numbered items in a menu.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
LIST
Displays the programme table.
(►
p.55)
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT
models only), Programme edit.
buttons
L/R SELECT
Use this to view 3D video. (► p.89)
FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen. (It doesn't
work at USB Mode and Simplink.)
The TV returns to normal viewing automatically if
no signal is received or no operation is performed
for 5 minutes.
If you keep the screen in Freeze condition, the
residual image can exist.
1
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(► p.62)
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment
and news services developed by Orange. (Only
France)
@
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
(► p.177)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
A-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard
settings.
Check and un-check programmes in the USB
menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
CHAR/NUM Shifts the Character or Number for NetCast menu.
3D
Use this to view 3D video. (► p.88)
DELETE Deletes the entered character when entering the
character on the screen keyboard.
MUTE
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
Programme
UP/DOWN
PAGE UP/ Move from one full set of screen information to the
DOWN next one.
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu (Photo List,
Music List and Movie List).
SIMPLINK /
MY MEDIA
Menu
control buttons
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-
ies with new ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in
A-58
reverse.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple Remote Control (Only 50/60PK9
50/60PX9 )
***
***,
(POWER)
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
External input mode rotate in regular sequence. p.57)
(►
TV/INPUT
Adjusts the volume.
VOLUME UP
/DOWN
Switches the sound on or off.
Selects a programme.
MUTE
Programme
UP/DOWN
Selects a programme.
Selects numbered items in a menu.
0 to 9 number
button
OK
Accepts your selection or displays the current
mode.
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
Installing Batteries
■ Open the battery compartment cover
on the back and install the batteries
matching correct polarity (+with
+,-with -).
■ Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Do not
mix old or used batteries with new
ones.
■ Close cover.
■ To remove the batteries, perform the
installation actions in reverse.
A-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
■ To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
ANTENNA CONNECTION
■ For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction.
■ An antenna cable and converter are not supplied.
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
Wall
Antenna
Socket
(Connect to wall antenna socket)
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
Outdoor
Antenna
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(VHF, UHF)
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)
UHF
Antenna
Signal
Amplifier
VHF
■ In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier
to the antenna as shown above.
■ If signal needs to be split for two TVs, use an antenna signal splitter for connection.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
■ To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting
all equipment.
■ This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the 32/37/42/47/55LE7
***
models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
CONNECTING WITH A COMPONENT CABLE
This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you do
receive Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the diagram as
shown below.
(
)
Connect the video outputs Y, PB, PR of the
external equipment (digital set-top box, DVD,
etc.) to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on
the TV.
1
1
Connect the audio output of the external equip-
ment (digital set-top box, DVD, etc.) to the
COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.
2
3
4
2
Turn on the external equipment.
(
Refer to the external equipment's manual for
operating instructions.)
Select the Component1 input source using the
INPUT button on the remote control.
or
If connected to COMPONENT IN 2, select
Component2 input source.
1
► HDMI Audio Supported format : Dolby Digital, PCM.
DTS Audio format is not supported.
2
Signal
Component
HDMI
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p/1080i
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
1080p
(24 Hz / 30 Hz /
50 Hz / 60 Hz)
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)
Component Input ports
To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below.
Component ports on the TV
Y
P
B
P
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
P
B
P
R
B-Y
Cb
Pb
R-Y
Cr
Video output ports
on DVD player
Pr
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI CABLE
Connect the HDMI output of the external equipment (digital set-
1
top box, DVD, etc.) to HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI), HDMI/DVI IN 2,
HDMI/DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 (Except for 32/37/42LD4
,
***
32/37/42/47/55LD6 , 32/42/47LD7 , 32/37/42LD8 ) jack
*** *** ***
on the TV.
Turn on the external equipment.
2
3
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for operating
instructions.)
Select HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 (Except for
32/37/42LD4 , 32/37/42/47/55LD6 , 32/42/47LD7 ,
***
***
***
32/37/42LD8 ) input source using the INPUT button on the
***
1
remote control.
NOTE
►The TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously
when using an HDMI cable.
►If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the
output resolution appropriately.
►Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable. If
the HDMI cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering
or no screen display can result. Please use the High Speed
HDMI Cable.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI TO DVI CABLE
Connect the digital set-top box or the DVI out-
put of the PC to HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI) jack on
1
the TV.
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top
box or the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
2
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
Turn on the digital set-top box or the PC and
the TV.
3
1
2
(
Refer to the digital set-top box or the PC
manual for operating instructions.)
Select HDMI1 input source using the INPUT
button on the remote control.
4
or
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING WITH A EURO SCART CABLE
Connect the Euro scart socket of the external
equipment (DVD, VCR, etc.) to the AV1 Euro
1
scart socket on the TV.
Turn on the external equipment.
2
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for
operating instructions.)
Select AV1 input source using the INPUT but-
ton on the remote control.
3
1
Input
Audio
O
Output
Scart
AV1
Video
RGB
Video, Audio
Analogue TV, Digital TV
O
O
Output Type
►TV Out : Outputs Analogue TV
AV1
AV1
(TV Out)
(When DTV scheduled recording is in
progress using recording equipment.)
Current
or Digital TV signals.
input mode
Digital TV
Digital TV
Analogue TV
Analogue TV
X
O
Analogue TV, AV
Component/RGB
HDMI
O
(The input mode is converted to DTV.)
X
NOTE
►Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded.
►When watching digital TV in 3D imaging mode, monitor out signals cannot be output through the
SCART cable. (Only 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
)
***
*** ***
► If you set the 3D mode to On while a scheduled recording is performed on digital TV, monitor out
signals cannot be output through the SCART cable, and the recording cannot be performed.
(Only 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9 )
***
***
***
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
USB SETUP
Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1 or
USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
1
1
or
After connecting the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2
2
jack, you use the USB function. ( p.90)
►
CONNECTING WITH AN RF CABLE
To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV.
Connect the ANT OUT socket of the VCR to
the ANTENNA IN socket on the TV.
1
1
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT IN
socket of the VCR.
2
Press the PLAY button on the VCR and match
the appropriate channel between the TV and
VCR for viewing.
Wall Jack
Antenna
3
2
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING WITH AN RCA CABLE
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV
and VCR or external equipment. Match the
1
jack colours (Video = yellow, Audio Left =
white, and Audio Right = red)
1
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press
2
(
PLAY on the VCR. Refer to the VCR owner’s
)
manual.
Or, Operate the corresponding external equip-
ment.
(Refer to external equipment operating guide.)
Select AV2 input source using the INPUT but-
ton on the remote control.
3
If connected to AV IN 3, select AV3 input
or
source.
NOTE
► If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable from
Video Game Set
the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the TV.
Camcorder
or
1
or
Video Game Set
Camcorder
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
CONNECTING WITH A D-SUB 15 PIN CABLE
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's set-
tings.
Connect the RGB output of the PC to the RGB
IN (PC) jack on the TV.
1
Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
2
Turn on the PC and the TV
3
Select RGB input source using the INPUT but-
ton on the remote control.
4
2
1
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSERTION OF A CI MODULE
To view the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV mode.
This feature is not available in all countries.
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA (Personal
Computer Memory Card International
1
Association) CARD SLOT of TV as shown.
For further information, see p.48.
Check this point as
shown and insert the CI
Module.
NOTE
► Check if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot
in the right direction. If the module is not inserted properly,
this can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot.
HEADPHONE SETUP
(Except for 50/60PK5 , 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 , 50/60PX9 , 42/47LX6 ,
** *** *** *** ***
47/55LX9 )
***
You can listen the sound through the headphone.
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
1
To adjust the headphone volume, press the
+ or - button. If you press the MUTE button,
the sound from the headphone is switched off.
2
NOTE
► AUDIO menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone.
► When changing AV MODE with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.
► Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone.
►Headphone impedance: 16 Ω
►Max audio output of headphone: 10 mW to 15 mW
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP
Sending the TV’s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port.
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).
Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV
1
(
)
Digital Audio Optical Output port.
Connect the other end of the optical cable to
2
3
(
)
the digital audio Optical input on the audio
equipment.
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off ” in the
1
2
AUDIO menu.( p.159). Refer to the external
►
audio equipment instruction manual for opera-
tion.
CAUTION
► Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser
beam may damage your vision.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION
(Except for 32/37/42LD4 )
***
LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold
separately. When you connect the Wireless Ready Dongle (included with the Wireless Media Box) to the
TV, external devices can be connected to the LG Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be sent to
the TV wirelessly.
After the wireless is connected, press the INPUT button to view the wireless input screen.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for operating instructions.
Connect the WIRELESS CONTROL jack of the
Wireless Ready Dongle to the WIRELESS
1
2
CONTROL jack on the TV.
Connect HDMI OUT jack of the Wireless
Ready Dongle to the HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI),
HDMI/DVI IN 2, HDMI/DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4
(Except for 32/37/42LD4
,
***
32/37/42/47/55LD6 , 32/42/47LD7
,
***
***
32/37/42LD8 ) jack on the TV.
***
LG Wireless Media Box
NOTE
►WIRELESS CONTROL : Wireless Ready Dongle power supply and control usage.
►HDMI : Video/Audio signal is connected in Wireless Ready Dongle.
►When you connect to the Wireless Media Box (Separately sold product), you can watch the
external device connected to the Wireless Media Box through wireless connection.
►When using the external device connected to the Wireless Media Box, some functions of the TV
menu may not work.
► In wireless external output, Real Cinema and Digital Noise Reduction functions are not supported.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
SUPPORTED DISPLAY RESOLUTION
Plasma TV Models
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical
Vertical
Resolution
Frequency
(kHz)
Resolution
Frequency
(kHz)
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (Hz)
720x400
640x480
31.468
31.469
37.879
48.363
47.78
70.08
59.94
60.31
60.00
59.87
59.80
60.02
31.469
31.5
59.94
60
720x480
720x576
800x600
31.25
37.5
50
1024x768
1280x768
1360x768
1280x1024
1920x1080
(RGB-PC)
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
50
1280x720
44.96
45
59.94
60
47.72
63.981
33.72
33.75
28.125
26.97
27
59.94
60
66.587
67.5
59.93
60.00
50
23.97
24
1920x1080
33.716
33.75
56.25
67.43
67.5
29.976
30.00
50
59.94
60
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD TV Models / LED LCD TV Models
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode
Horizontal
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode
Horizontal
Vertical
Vertical
Resolution
Frequency
(kHz)
Resolution
Frequency
(kHz)
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (Hz)
720x400
640x480
31.468
31.469
37.879
48.363
47.78
70.08
59.94
60.31
60.00
59.87
59.80
60.02
31.469
31.5
59.94
60
720x480
720x576
800x600
31.25
37.5
50
1024x768
1280x768
1360x768
1280x1024
1920x1080
(RGB-PC)
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
50
1280x720
44.96
45
59.94
60
47.72
63.981
33.72
33.75
28.125
26.97
27
59.94
60
66.587
67.5
59.93
60.00
50
23.97
24
1920x1080
33.716
33.75
56.25
67.43
67.5
29.976
30.00
50
59.94
60
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NOTE
► Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio
► Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set’s screen
for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image
may become permanently imprinted on the
screen; use a screen saver when possible.
input on the TV. (Audio cables are not included with
the TV).
► If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as required.
► If the graphic card on the PC does not output ana-
logue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect only
one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) to
display the PC output on the TV.
► There may be interference relating to resolution,
vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC
mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution
or change the refresh rate to another rate or
adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu
until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the
PC graphic card can not be changed, change the
PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of
the PC graphic card.
► If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue
and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either
RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and
Play automatically by the TV.)
► DOS mode may not work depending on the video
card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.
► The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal
and Vertical frequencies are separate.
► If you use too long an RGB-PC cable, there may be
interference on the screen. We recommend using
under 5m of cable. This provides the best picture
quality.
► We recommend using 1920x1080, 60 Hz for the
PC mode, this should provide the best picture
quality.
► Connect the signal cable from the monitor output
port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the TV or
the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the
PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) port on the
TV.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN SETUP FOR PC MODE
Screen Reset
Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings.
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
Move
Prev.
SCREEN
PICTURE
Move
OK
Resolution
• Colour
60
0
Auto Config.
Position
Size
R
G
C
• Tint
W
• Colour Temp.
0
To Set
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
: Off
Yes
No
• TruMotion
Phase
• Screen
Reset
1
2
3
4
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
Select Reset.
Select Yes.
5
Run Reset.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only)
Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the
image is still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment.
Auto configure
This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image
will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress.
Move
Prev.
SCREEN
PICTURE
Move
OK
Resolution
• Colour
60
0
Auto Config.
Position
Size
R
G
C
• Tint
W
• Colour Temp.
0
Auto Config.
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
: Off
Yes
No
• TruMotion
Phase
• Screen
Reset
1
2
3
4
• If the position of the image is still not correct,
try Auto adjustment again.
Select PICTURE.
• If picture needs to be adjusted again after
Auto adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust
the Position, Size or Phase.
Select Screen.
Select Auto Config..
Select Yes.
5
Run Auto Config..
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Resolution
To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode.
This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC]
Move
Prev.
SCREEN
PICTURE
Move
OK
1024 x 768
Resolution
• Colour
60
0
1280 x 768
1360 x 768
Auto Config.
Position
Size
R
G
C
• Tint
W
• Colour Temp.
0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
: Off
• TruMotion
Phase
• Screen
Reset
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
Select Resolution.
4
5
Select the desired resolution.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust
the picture position manually.
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
Prev.
Move
SCREEN
PICTURE
Move
OK
Resolution
• Colour
60
0
Auto Config.
Position
Size
R
G
C
• Tint
W
• Colour Temp.
0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
: Off
Phase
• TruMotion
• Screen
Reset
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select Screen.
Select Position, Size or Phase.
4
5
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK SETUP
Wired Network Connection
This TV can be connected to a local area network (LAN) via the LAN port. After making the physical
connection, the TV needs to be set up for network communication.
1
Broadband Modem
Router
Broadband Modem
Broadband Service
Broadband Service
1
Connect the LAN port of the Modem or Router to the LAN
port on the TV.
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
2
3
After connecting the LAN port, use the NetCast menu.
For more information about NETCAST setup and trouble-
shooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.com. Search for
NetCast.
CAUTION
►Do not connect a modular phone cable to the LAN port.
►Since there are various connection methods, please follow the specifications of your
telecommunication carrier or internet service provider.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wired Network Setup
If wired and wireless networks are both available, wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small number of home networks may require the TV network
settings to be adjusted.
For detail information, contact your internet provider or router manual.
If you already set
the Network Setting
NETWORK
Move
OK
Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?
• Network Setting : Wired
Network Type
•
Network Status
: Internet is c
Wired network is recommended
Wired
• Legal Notice
OK
Resetting
Wireless
ꔉ Next
Exit
Appeared when
wired and wireless
are simultaneously
connected.
IP Manual Setting
IP Auto Setting
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Status
Select the IP setting mode.
Insert the IP address.
IP Mode
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
IP Mode
◄ IP Manual Setting ►
TV
● IP Address
● Subnet Mask
● Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
● IP Address
● Subnet Mask
● Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
Network connecting
● DNS Server
● DNS Server
OK
OK
Setting
Test
Close
Previous
Exit
Previous
Exit
1
2
3
Select NETWORK.
Select Network Setting.
Select Wired.
4
5
If you already set Network Setting: Select Resetting. The new connection settings
resets the current network settings.
Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual Setting.
When Selecting IP Manual Setting:
IP addresses will need to be input manually.
6
Select OK.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ This feature requires an always-on broadband internet connection.
■ You do not need to connect to a PC to use this function.
■ If Network Setting is not working, check your network conditions. Check the LAN cable and
make sure your router has DHCP turned on if you wish to use the Auto Setting.
■ If the Network Setting is not completed, network may not operate normally.
■ IP Auto Setting: Select it if there is a DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) via wired
connection, the TV will automatically be allocated an IP address. If you’re using a broadband
router or broadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function, the IP address will automatically be determined.
■ IP Manual Setting: Select it if there is no DHCP server on the network and you want to set the IP
address manually.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
NOTE
►For more information about Netcast setup and ►The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or its
troubleshooting, visit http://lgknowledgebase.
usage may be limited depending on the poli-
cies and restrictions of your ISP. For details,
contact your ISP directly.
com. Search for Netcast.
►Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5
►The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless tele-
phone, Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven,
and can be affected by interference from them.
It can be interrupted by the device using 5 Ghz
radio frequencies. It is same device with LG
wireless media box, cordless telephone, other
Wi-Fi device.
►It may decrease the service speed using
Wireless network by surrounding wireless con-
dition.
►Turn off all unused network equipment in your
local home network. Some devices may gener-
ate network traffic.
►In some instances, placing the access point or
wireless router higher up away from the floor
may improve the reception.
►The reception quality over wireless depends
on many factors such as type of the access
point, distance between the TV and access
point, and the location of the TV.
or better with a RJ45 connector.
►Many network connection problems during set
up can often be fixed by re-setting the router
or modem. After connecting the player to the
home network, quickly power off and/or dis-
connect the power cable of the home network
router or cable modem. Then power on and/or
connect the power cable again.
►Depending on the internet service provider (ISP),
the number of devices that can receive internet
service may be limited by the applicable terms of
service. For details, contact your ISP.
►LG is not responsible for any malfunction of
the TV and/or the internet connection feature
due to communication errors/malfunctions
associated with your broadband internet con-
nection, or other connected equipment.
►LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
►Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the TV.
If you have questions about such content,
please contact the producer of the content.
►You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
►Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by
the Internet service provider (ISP) supplying
your broadband Internet connection.
►
When connecting internet through the wired/
wireless sharing machine, it may interrupt the
connection because of the use limitation and
confirmation of service company.
►To connect wireless AP, an AP that supports
the wireless connection is necessary, and the
wireless connection function of the AP needs
to be activated. Please enquire to the AP
supplier for the possibility of AP wireless con-
nections.
►Please verify the security settings of AP SSID
for wireless AP connection, and enquire to
the AP supplier for the AP SSID security set-
tings.
►The TV can become slower or malfunction
with wrong settings of network equipments
(wired/wireless router, hub, etc). Please
install correctly by referring to the manual of
the equipment, and set the network.
►When AP is set to include 802.11 n(Except
for Russia), and if Encryption is designated
as WEP(64/128bit) or WPA(TKIP/AES), the
connection may not be possible. There may
be different connection methods according to
the AP manufacturers.
►Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your respon-
sibility.
►
A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is
required for connection to this TV. If your internet
service does not allow for such a connection,
you will not be able to connect the TV.
►A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable
modem service. Depending on the access
method of and subscriber agreement with your
ISP, you may not be able to use the internet
connection feature contained in this TV or you
may be limited to the number of devices you
can connect at the same time. (If your ISP lim-
its sub-scription to one device, this TV may not
be allowed to connect when a PC is already
connected.)
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wireless Network Connection
The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor, allows the TV to connect to a wireless lan
network.
The network configuration and connection method may vary depending on the equipment in use and
the network environment. Refer to the setup instructions supplied with your access point or wireless
router for detailed connection steps and network settings.
Connect the “LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA
Adaptor” to the USB IN 1 or USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
1
Select “Network Setting” in the NETWORK menu.
After connecting, you can use the NetCast menu.
2
NOTE
►For enjoying pictures, music, or video stored in the PC using the router, the use of wired port in
the router is recommended.
►When the wireless port of the router is used, there may be restrictions for some functions.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Wireless Network Setup
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless router is required before connecting the TV to the network.
If you already set the
Network Setting
NETWORK
Move
OK
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type
Setting from the AP list
• Network Setting : Wired
Previous setting value exists. Do
you want to connect with the
previous setting?
Network Type
•
Network Status
: Internet is c
Wired network is recommended
Wired
• Legal Notice
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
OK
Wireless
Setting Ad-hoc network
Resetting
ꔉ Next
ꔉ Next
Exit
Previous
Exit
Appeared when wired and wireless
are simultaneously connected.
If your AP is locked
Selecting AP
Network Setting
Inserting the security key
Select AP you want to connect.
Page 1/1
Select the IP setting mode.
Insert the security key of AP.
Insert 8~63 ASCII characters.
IP Mode
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
Input the new SSID
iptime
◄
►
● IP Address
● Subnet Mask
● Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
ASW
Access Point
Search
Network1
● DNS Server
Connecting with PIN mode
OK
Prev.
Cancel
OK
ꔉ Next
Exit
Previous
Exit
Previous
Exit
1
Scan the all available AP (Access
Point) or wireless routers within range
and display them as a list.
6
7
Select NETWORK.
2
3
Select an AP (Access Point) or
wireless router on the list.
(If your AP is locked, insert the
security key of AP).
Select Network Setting.
Select Wireless.
8
9
Input the security key of AP.
If you already set Network Setting:
Select Resetting.
4
5
Repeat step 4-5 on P.20.
The new connection settings resets
the current network settings.
Select Setting from the AP list.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a security code is already set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
If you want to connect the AP (Access Point) or router with PIN, use this feature.
Selecting AP
Connecting with PIN mode
Select AP you want to connect.
Page 1/1
Insert PIN number at the AP webpage and
press ‘Connect’ button.
Input the new SSID
PIN NUMBER : 12345670
Connect
iptime
ASW
Network1
Connecting with PIN mode
Access Point
For more information, check the AP manual.
Search
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
Repeat step 1-6 on P.24.
1
2
Connect the access point with PIN
mode.
RED
■ PIN number is the unique 8 digit number
of the dongle.
You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
3
Enter the PIN number to your device.
4
Select Connect.
Repeat step 4-5 on P.20.
5
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
If your access point or wireless router that supports PIN or WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), it’s available
to use your access point or wireless router within 120 counts. You do not need to know the access
point name (SSID: Service Set Identifier) and security code of your access point or wireless router.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Select the wireless network setting type.
Press PBC mode button of AP and press ‘Connect’ button.
Setting from the AP list
Connect
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Caution: Check if PBC mode button is available for your AP.
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
Previous
Exit
Repeat step 1-4 on P.24.
1
2
Select Simple setting (WPS-button mode).
3
Select Connect.
Repeat step 4-5 on P.20.
4
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ad-hoc Mode
This is the method of communicating directly with the machine to communicate without AP.
This is the same as connecting two PCs with a cross cable.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting Ad-hoc network
Setting Ad-hoc network
Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting from the AP list
Insert the setting informatin into the device.
Features using exiting network can be unavailable. Do you
want to change network connection?
Network ID(SSID) : LGTV10
Security Key : 1111111111
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
OK
Cancel
Changing the setting information.
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
ꔉ Next
Connect
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
Previous
Exit
Previous
Exit
Setting Ad-hoc network
Network Setting
Network Status
TV
Insert the setting information into the device.
Insert the IP address.
Adhoc network is connected.
(LGTV10)
Network ID(SSID) : LGTV10
Security Key : 1111111111
IP Mode
IP Manual Setting
192 . 168 . 0 . 10
Signal Strength
● IP Address
Connecting the Ad-hoc network
Mac Address : 00:00:13:64:23:01
IP Address : 10.19.152.115
Subnet Mask : 255.255.254.0
●
Subnet Mask 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
● Gateway
● DNS Server
192 . 168 . 0 . 1
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
Gateway
Setting
Gateway
: 10.19.152.1
Cancel
OK
Test
Close
●
Example of the PC setting that
supports a wireless network
Previous
Exit
1. Find a wireless network device
in your PC.
●
2. Select LGTV10 that appears in
the list. (Select the same name
as the network ID that appears
on your TV screen.)
PC Setting
Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) of PC needs to be set
manually.
IP address, Subnet Mask, and default Gateway
can be set with your own discretion.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.1 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.10
3. Type 1111111111 in the Inserting
the security key dialog.
(Type the security key that
appears on your TV screen.)
●
TV Setting
Verify IP address and gateway of PC.
Input Gateway address of PC to IP Address, and
IP Address of PC to Gateway, and select OK.
i.e) IP address: 192.168.0.10 / Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0 / default Gateway: 192.168.0.1
Repeat step 1-3 on P.24.
1
2
5
Select Setting Ad-hoc network.
Insert the IP address.
6
3
Network setting is completed.
Select Close.
Select OK.
Select Connect to connect Ad-hoc network.
You can see the Network ID and Security Key on
your TV screen.
Enter this Network ID and Security Key to your
device.If a network may not operate, change the
setting information using the RED button.
4
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Network Status
Network Status
NETWORK
Move
OK
TV
• Network Setting : Wired
•
Network Status
Internet is connected
:
Network connecting
• Legal Notice
Setting
Test
Close
Select the wireless network setting type.
Select the wireless network setting type.
Network Setting
Select the IP setting mode.
Setting from the AP list
IP Mode
◄ IP Auto Setting ►
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
● IP Address
● Subnet Mask
● Gateway
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
255 . 255 . 0 . 0
Setting Ad-hoc network
ꔉ Next
Previous
Exit
● DNS Server
OK
Wireless Connection
Previous
Exit
Wired Connection
1
2
■ Setting: Return to the network setting
menu or wireless network setting type
menu.
Select NETWORK.
■ Test: Test the current network status
Select Network Status.
after setting the network.
■ Close: Return to the previous menu.
3
Check the network status.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
TURNING ON THE TV
When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features.
Firstly, connect the power cord correctly.
1
At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode.
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I, INPUT or P
button on the TV or press
2
the POWER, INPUT, P
or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will
switch on.
INITIALIZING SETUP
If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can adjust
the Language, Mode Setting, Power Indicator(When you select Home Use from Mode Setting-
1
Only LED LCD TV models), Country(Except for 32/37/42LE49 , 32/37/42/47/55LE59 ,
**
**
42/47LE7390, 32/37/42/47/55LE79 , 42/47/55LE89 , 32/37/42LD4
9
**
,
32/37/42/47/55LD69 ,
**
**
**
32/42/47LD79 , 32/37/42LD89 , 42/47LX69 , 50/60PK59 , 50/60PK79 , 50/60PK99 ,
50/60PX99 ) or Time Zone (When Russia is selected for Country) or Set Password(When
**
**
**
*
**
**
**
France is selected for Country), Auto Tuning.
Note:
a.If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed again.
b.Press the BACK button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD.
c.For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might
not work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment.
d."Home Use” mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode.
e."Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality data,
“Store Demo” mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period of time.
f. The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the
OPTION menu.
g
. When France is selected for Country, password is not ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ but ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’.
PROGRAMME SELECTION
Press the P
or NUMBER buttons to select a programme number.
1
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Press the
+ or - button to adjust the volume.
1
If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
2
You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE,
+ , - or AV Mode button.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
QUICK MENU
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.
Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture for-
Audio or Audio Language : Selects the
mat.
sound output.
For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After complet-
ing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to
Q.Menu.
Sleep Timer : Sets the sleep timer.
Skip Off/On : Selects the Skip Off/On.
USB Device : Selects “Eject” in order to eject
USB device.
Clear Voice II : By differentiating the human
sound range from others, it helps users lis-
ten to human voices better.
Picture Mode : Selects your desired Picture
Mode.
Sound Mode : It is a feature to automatical-
ly set the sound combination which it deems
the best for the images being watched.
Selects your desired Sound Mode.
Aspect Ratio
◄
►
16:9
Exit
1
2
3
Display each menu.
Select your desired Source.
• Press the Q.MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
1
• Press the RED button, you can check the
Customer Support menu.
Display each menu.
• Press the GREEN button, you can check
the Simple Manual menu.
2
Select a menu item.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to
normal TV viewing.
3
Move to the pop up menu.
• Press the BACK button to move to the
previous menu screen.
NOTE
►It is possible to use ISM Method in Plasma TV models only.
►It is possible to use Backlight, Power Indicator in LCD TV/LED LCD TV models only.
►It is not possible to use CI Information in Analogue mode.
Move
OK
PICTURE
Move
OK
SETUP
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
SETUP
PICTURE
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Picture Wizard
ꕊ Energy Saving : Off
Picture Mode : Standard
: Off
CI Information
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
70
100
50
TIME
Move
OK
AUDIO
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
Auto Volume
: Off
: Off
●
●
●
●
Clock
AUDIO
TIME
Clear Voice II
Balance
3
Off Time
On Time
Sleep Timer
: Off
: Off
: Off
L
R
0
Sound Mode
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
LOCK
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
Set Password
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Lock System
: Off
Country
: UK
LOCK
OPTION
●
●
●
Block Programme
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Input Block
: Off
●
Key Lock
: 1
Mode Setting
: Home Use
●
For further information, refer to the optional
“Wireless Media Box” manual for operating
instructions. (Except for 32/37/42LD4
)
***
Exit
OK
NETWORK
Bluetooth
Move
OK
Move
• Network Setting : Wired
Bluetooth on
Bluetooth is off.
NETWORK
•
Network Status
: Internet is connected
BLUETOOTH
Select 'Bluetooth On' on the left to turn on Bluetooth.
• Legal Notice
(Except for 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ,
*** ***
42/47LE73 , 32/37/42LD4 , 32/37/42/47/55LD6 ,
** *** ***
32/42/47LD7 , 32/37/42LD8 , 42/47LX6
***
,
***
***
47/55LX9 , 50/60PK5 , 50/60PX9
*** **
)
***
GAME
MY MEDIA
GAME
JUMP
HOLE IN ONE
WHACK A MOLE SUDOKU COOKING BURGER
MY MEDIA
Movie List
Photo List
Music List
SAVING CRYSTAL INVADER URGENT SURVIVAL
Press OK( ) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
Exit
Exit
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Input List
Move
OK
INPUT
Antenna
RGB
USB1
USB2
AV1
AV2
Component
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
Input Label
Exit
(Only 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5
,
***
***
42/47LE73 , 32/37/42LD4 ,
** ***
32/37/42/47/55LD6
,
***
32/42/47LD7 , 32/37/42LD8
,
42/47LX6
,
***
***
***
47/55LX9 , 50/60PK5 , 50/60PX9
)
***
*** **
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING
Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.
When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.
The maximum number of programmes that can be stored is 1,000. But the number may differ slightly
depending on broadcasting signals.
DVB-T, DVB-C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable.
If you want to select the Antenna,
Move
OK
Move
OK
SETUP
SETUP
Please select your TV Connection.
Antenna
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
●
●
●
●
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Antenna
Cable
Antenna
: Off
Antenna
Cable
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
CI Information
CI Information
If you select antenna or cable,
existing channel information is
deleted.
SECAM L Search
Automatic Numbering
Antenna
Cable
Start
Close
Close
1
2
3
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in
Lock System ‘On’.
Select SETUP.
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning select Start using
the
button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise
Select Auto Tuning.
Select Antenna.
select Close.
•
Automatic Numbering: Decide whether to use the programme
numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning.
• SECAM L Search : Except for 32/37/42LE49 ,
**
32/37/42/47/55LE59 , 42/47LE7390, 32/37/42/47/55LE79 ,
** **
4
5
42/47/55LE89 , 32/37/42LD4
9
,
32/37/42/47/55LD69 ,
**
** **
Select Start.
32/42/47LD79 , 32/37/42LD89 , 42/47LX69 ,
** ** **
50/60PK59 , 50/60PK79 , 50/60PK99 , 50/60PX99
** ** **
*
• When select Italy in the County menu, If the pop up is
displayed when the conflicted programme after Auto
Tuning, select a broadcaster for Conflicting programme
number to solve.
Run Auto tuning.
•
In the following country, DVB cable can be used : Germany, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland,
Denmark, Austria, Finland, Norway, Slovenia, Hungary, Ukraine(Except for 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9
,
*** ***
50/60PX9 ).(The supported country can be added.)
***
• In the following country, Digital TV can not be used : Slovakia, Bosnia, Serbia, Bulgaria, Albania,
Kazakhstan
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
33
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
If you want to select the Cable,
Move
OK
Move
OK
Move
OK
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
Please select your TV Connection.
Service Operator
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
●
●
●
●
●
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Antenna
Cable
Comhem
Other Operators
: Off
Antenna
Cable
CI Information
Cable DTV Setting
CI Information
Cable DTV Setting
CI Information
Cable DTV Setting
Previous
Next
If you select antenna or cable,
existing channel information is
deleted.
Antenna
Cable
Close
1
2
3
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
Select SETUP.
Select Auto Tuning.
Select Cable.
•
When you select the Cable, the Cable
Service Operator selection screen can differ
or not exist by the Cable situation of the
applicable country.
• The popup window to select between
Service Operator is only shown initially for
the 3 cases when you accessing the
Initial Setting menu, when you change
from Antenna to Cable or when you
access the menu after changing the
Country.
4
5
Select Comhem or Other
Operators.
Select Quick or Full.
• When you want to select between Service
Operator aside from the above 3 cases,
you can do so by selecting Setup->Cable
DTV Setting-> Service Operator.
• Acquired certification SO : Sweden(Comhem, Canal Digital), Denmark(YouSee, Canal Digital,
Stofa), Norway(Canal Digital), Netherlands(Ziggo)(Except for 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9
,
*** ***
50/60PX9
)
, Ukraine(Volia-Cable)(Except for 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9 ).
***
*** *** ***
• If there are not any Service Operator that you want, select Other Operators.
• If you select “Other Operators”, or the selected country supports “Other Operators” only, it may
take some time to search all the channels, or it may not search some of the channels.
If some of the channels do not appear, follow the steps below:
1. SETUP -> Auto Tuning -> Cable -> Setting
2. Switch Home Tuning from "Off" to "On"
3. Input additional values such as the frequency, symbol rate, modulation, and network ID.
(You can ask your cable service provider for the above information.)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When you select the Quick,
Cable
Home Tuning
Quick
Quick
◄
►
On
Start Frequency(kHz) : 114000
●
●
●
Frequency(kHz)
Symbol rate(kS/s)
Modulation
Start Frequency(kHz) : 114000
362000
6900
Cable
End Frequency(kHz)
Network
: 862000
: Auto
End Frequency(kHz)
Network
: 862000
: Auto
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
640QAM
Network ID
Auto
0
Skip Scramble Programme
Automatic Numbering
Setting
Setting
OK
OK
Start
Start Frequency(kHz)
End Frequency(kHz)
114000
862000
Close
Close
Close
Reset
Close
6
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select
Start using the button. Then, press
Select Quick.
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
7
• Automatic Numbering: Decide whether
to use the programme numbers as sent
by broadcasting stations for tuning.
Select Setting.
8
Make appropriate
adjustments.
• Skip Scramble Programme : Scramble
Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning
and Manual Tuning.
9
Select Close.
10
11
12
Select OK.
Select Start.
Run Auto tuning.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ When you select the Full,
Cable
Full
Search every available signal.
Cable
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto Tuning.
Skip Scramble Programme
Automatic Numbering
OK
Start
Close
Close
6
7
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select
Start using the button. Then, press
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
• Automatic Numbering: Decide whether
to use the programme numbers as sent
by broadcasting stations for tuning.
• Skip Scramble Programme : Scramble
Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning
and Manual Tuning.
Select Full.
Select OK.
Select Start.
8
•
You can not select the Full when the service
operator is set to "Ziggo" or "Other
9
Run Auto tuning.
Operators" of Netherlands. (Except for
42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
)
*** *** ***
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly.
The commonly used values are provided as "default".
However, for correct settings, please inquire of the cable service provider.
When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode, selecting Full will search through all frequencies to
find available channels.
In the case when the programme is not searched by selecting the Default, perform the searching by
selecting the Full.
However, in the case when the programme is searched by selecting the Full, the Auto Tuning time can be
taken too much.
• Frequency : Enter a user-defined frequency.
• Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as
modem sends symbols to a channel).
• Modulation : Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier).
• Network ID : Unique identifier allocated for each user.
•
•
: Enter a user-defined start frequency range.
: Enter a user-defined end frequency range.
Start Frequency
End Frequency
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
CABLE DTV SETTING
(IN CABLE MODE ONLY)
The range that a user can select from the Service Operator menu differs depending on number of
Service Operator supported by each country, and if number of supported Service Operator for each
country is 1, corresponding function becomes non-activation.
After changing Service Operator, a warning window saying that channel map will be deleted when OK
button is pressed or Close is selected, and a Auto-tuning pop-up window appears when ‘YES’ is
selected.
Move
OK
Move
OK
SETUP
SETUP
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Service Operator
◄
►
Comhem
Off
: Off
: Off
Channel Auto Update
CI Information
CI Information
●
Cable DTV Setting
●
Cable DTV Setting
Close
• If you select Cable, you can see Cable
DTV Setting menu.
1
2
3
Select SETUP.
•
When Channel Auto Update is On, you
can update information for all the pro-
grammes that can be updated, including
the programme currently being watched.
Select Cable DTV Setting.
• When Channel Auto Update is Off, you
can only update information for the pro-
gramme currently being watched.
Select Service Operator or Channel
Auto Update.
4
• You can not select the Cable DTV Setting
when the service operator is set to "Ziggo".
Select your desired Source.
(Except for 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9
,
*** ***
50/60PX9 )
***
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.
If you want to select the Antenna,
Move
OK
◄
SETUP
SETUP
►
DTV
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
UHF CH.
Frequency(kHz)
:
30
474000
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
: Off
CI Information
●
CI Information
● Signal Strength
50%
● Signal Quality
50%
Add
Close
1
2
3
Select SETUP.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
• You can select SBAND when the country is
set to "Norway, Latvia."
Select Manual Tuning.
Select DTV.
4
5
Select the desired channel number.
Select update or add if signal present.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
If you want to select the Cable,
Move
OK
◄
►
SETUP
SETUP
Cable DTV
Frequency(kHz)
Symbol rate(kS/s)
Modulation
●
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
362000
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
6875
64QAM
: Off
CI Information
Cable DTV Setting
CI Information
Cable DTV Setting
● Signal Strength
50%
● Signal Quality
50%
Add
Close
1
2
3
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit
password in Lock System ‘On’.
Select SETUP.
• Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined
symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at
which a device such as modem sends
symbols to a channel).
• Modulation : Enter a user-defined
modulation. (Modulation: Loading of
audio or video signals onto carrier).
Select Manual Tuning.
Select Cable DTV.
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
• You can not select the Cable DTV
when the service operator is set to
"Ziggo" or "Other Operators" of
Netherlands. (Except for 42/47LX6
,
***
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
)
*** ***
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING
(IN ANALOGUE MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire.
Move
OK
Move
OK
SETUP
SETUP
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
◄
►
TV
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
◄
Cable
►
TV
●
●
●
●
Storage
System
Band
3
●
●
●
●
Storage
System
Band
3
: Off
: Off
BG
BG
CI Information
CI Information
V/UHF
V/UHF
or
Channel
0
Channel
0
●
●
●
Fine
◄ ►
●
●
●
Fine
◄ ►
Search
Name
◄ ►
Search
Name
◄ ►
C 02
C 02
Store
Close
Store
Close
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
Select V/UHF or Cable.
Select SETUP.
Select the desired
channel number.
or
Select Manual Tuning.
Select TV or Cable TV.
Commence searching.
Select the desired
programme
Select Store.
4
5
or
number on.
Select a TV system.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System ‘On’.
• L : SECAM L/L’ (France)
BG : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa)
I : PAL I (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South Africa)
DK : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe / China / Africa / CIS)
• To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Move
OK
Move
OK
SETUP
SETUP
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
◄
►
◄
Cable
►
TV
TV
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
●
●
●
●
●
Storage
System
Band
Storage
System
Band
3
3
●
●
●
: Off
: Off
BG
BG
CI Information
CI Information
V/UHF
V/UHF
or
Channel
Fine
Channel
0
0
●
●
●
●
●
●
Fine
◄ ►
◄ ►
Search
Name
Search
Name
◄ ►
◄ ►
C 02
C 02
Store
Close
Store
Close
■ Assigning a station name
You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number.
Select the position and make
your choice of the second
character, and so on.
1
2
3
Select SETUP.
5
You can use an the alphabet
A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/
-, and blank.
Select Manual Tuning.
Select TV or Cable TV.
Select Name.
6
7
Select Close.
4
Select Store.
■ Fine Tuning
Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select SETUP.
Select Fine.
Select Manual Tuning.
Fine tune for the best picture
and sound.
Select TV or Cable TV.
Select Store.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROGRAMME EDIT
When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P
during TV viewing.
button
If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER
buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu.
This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.
You can change the programme number using “Move”function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked
when you start Auto Tuning.
Page 1/2
A
Favourite Group :
DTV
Programme Edit
RADIO
TV
Move
OK
SETUP
801 YLE TV2
804 YLE Teema
807 CNN
802 YLE FST
800 YLE TV1
803 YLE24
●
●
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
805 TV4 Stockholm
808 TV4
806 Kanal Lokal
809 TV4 Plus
812 TV4 Fakta
815 Demo
●ProgrammeEdit
810 TV400
813 MediaCorp HD5
816 TVE 1
819 CLAN/50 TVE
▼
811 TV4 Film
814 SNY_SSU
817 TVE 2
●
●
Booster
: Off
CI Information
818 24H TVE
820 LA7
Pr. Change
FAV
Q.MENU
Previous
Skip
Favourite Pr.
Favourite Pr. Group
Block/Unblock
P
Page Change
or
Page 1/2
A
Favourite Group :
Programme Edit
Cable DTV
Cable Radio
Cable TV
801 YLE TV2
804 YLE Teema
807 CNN
802 YLE FST
800 YLE TV1
803 YLE24
805 TV4 Stockholm
808 TV4
806 Kanal Lokal
809 TV4 Plus
812 TV4 Fakta
815 Demo
810 TV400
813 MediaCorp HD5
816 TVE 1
819 CLAN/50 TVE
▼
811 TV4 Film
814 SNY_SSU
817 TVE 2
818 24H TVE
820 LA7
Pr. Change
FAV
Q.MENU
Previous
Skip
Favourite Pr.
Favourite Pr. Group
Block/Unblock
P
Page Change
1
2
3
4
Select SETUP.
Select Programme Edit.
Enter the Programme Edit.
Select a programme to be stored or
skipped.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
IN DTV/RADIO MODE
■ Skipping a programme number
• When programmes are to be skipped, the
skipped programme shows in blue and
these programmes will not be selected by
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
Turn the programme number to blue.
Release.
the P
buttons during TV viewing.
2
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the
programme edit or EPG.
BLUE
3
BLUE
■ Locking a programme number
• It can be registered as Lock
programme even when Lock
System is turned Off.
1
Select a programme number to be locked.
2
Turn the programme number to yellow.
Release.
YELLOW
3
YELLOW
IN TV MODE
This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes.
You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers.
■ Deleting a programme
1
Select a programme number to be deleted.
2
Turn the programme number to red.
• The selected programme is deleted, all the
following programmes are shifted up one
RED
■ Moving a programme
1
3
Select a programme number to be moved.
Release.
GREEN
2
Turn the programme number to
green.
GREEN
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Skipping a programme number
• When a programme number is skipped it
means that you will be unable to select it
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
using the P
button during normal TV
viewing.
2
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the
programme edit or EPG.
Turn the programme number to blue.
Release.
BLUE
3
BLUE
■ Auto Sort
• After activating Auto Sort once, you can no
longer edit programmes.
1
Start Auto Sort.
■ Locking a programme number
• It can be registered as Lock
programme even when Lock
System is turned Off.
1
Select a programme number to be locked.
2
Turn the programme number to yellow.
Release.
YELLOW
3
YELLOW
■ Selecting favourite programme
Favourite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your
choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes.
1
Select your desired programme.
2
Add corresponding programme to Favourite
list of current Favourite group.
3
Release.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ Selecting favourite programme group
1
Select your desired programme.
2
Display a pop-up window where
Favourite group can be changed.
3
Select a Favourite group.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER
If reception is poor select Booster to "On".
When the signal is strong, select "Off".
Move
OK
Move
OK
SETUP
SETUP
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Programme Edit
Off
On
●
Booster
: On
●Booster
:On
●
CI Information
●
CI Information
1
2
3
Select SETUP.
Select Booster.
Select On or Off.
4
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION
This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI
Module, you cannot watch pay services.
When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you can access the module menu.
To purchase a module and smart card, contact your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a CI
module from the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI
Module, you may not have any sound output.
This may be incompatible with the CI module and smart card.
CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting cir-
cumstances.
When using a CAM(Conditional Access Module), please make sure it meets fully the requirements of
either DVB-CI or CI plus.
A abnormal process of CAM(Conditional Access Module) may cause a bad picture.
i
Viaccess Module
Move
OK
SETUP
Consultations
●
●
●
●
●
Auto Tuning
Authorizations
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Module information
: Off
CI Information
Select the item
• This OSD is only for illustration and the menu
options and screen format will vary according to
the Digital pay services provider.
• It is possible for you to change CI (Common
Interface) menu screen and service by consult-
ing your dealer.
1
2
3
4
Select SETUP.
Select CI Information.
Select the desired item: Module information, smart card
information, language, or software download etc.
Save.
• Press the BACK/EXIT button to move to the previous menu screen.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
You can update the TV with the latest software to enhance the product operation and/or add new features.
You can update the software by connecting the TV directly to the software update server.
The Software Update function may not work properly depending on your internet environment. In this case, you
can obtain the latest software from the authorized LG Electronics Service Center then update your TV.
Software Update
◄ On
►
Software Update
Picture Test
● Current version
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Sound Test
00.00.01
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Check Update Version
Close
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Close
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
• Use the Check Update Version to update the
1
2
Select Customer Support.
RED
latest software on the Network server manually.
Select Software Update.
Select On or Off.
3
4
• If you select On, a user confirm message box will
be displayed to notify that new software is found.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ When setting “Software Update”
Occasionally, a transmission of
updated digital software infor-
mation will result in the following
menu on the TV screen.
Download starts when "Yes" is
selected.
TV is restarted when download
is completed.
Download progress status can
be checked from Software
Update menu.
Software update is available.
?
Would you like to download now?
Update is completed.
Rebooting now.
Yes
No
Software Update
◄ On
►
Software downloading progress.
Ver. 00.00.01 ► Ver.00.00.02
Simple Update : for current
update stream
4%
Check Update Version
Close
A new software update is available at
00/00/0 00:00.
?
Do you want to update the software when
available?
Yes
No
Schedule Update : for scheduled
update stream
When the Software Update menu
is "Off", the message to change it
to "On" appears.
When new Software is available when
connected to Internet, the following
message will be displayed.
New software version is ready. Do you
want to update it?
?
Starting Update
Remind me later
- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:
• Power to the TV must not be interrupted.
• After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Software Update menu.
• It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.
<Simple Update, Schedule Update>
• The antenna must not be disconnected.
• The software is downloaded only in Standby mode or in MUX with Software Update Service, and stops
when the power cord is unplugged or when viewing MUX without Software Update Service.
• When you return to Standby mode or MUX with Software Update Service, the software download will
resume from where it stopped.
<Network Update>
• You do not disconnect the network while the software is being updated.
• When there is a new software update when you open NetCast, you will not be able to use NetCast with-
out updating the software.
• You cannot open NetCast while the software is being updated.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE/SOUND TEST
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.
Software Update
Do you have a problem in this test
screen?
Picture Test
?
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Sound Test
Signal Test
Yes
No
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Close
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
1
2
3
Select Customer Support.
RED
Select Picture Test or Sound Test.
Select Yes or No.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIGNAL TEST
This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and
Software Version.
This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.
This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.
(*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple chan-
nels.))
Engineering Diagnostics
Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc.
Software Update
Picture Test
Model/Type : 42LE7500-ZA
Serial No. : SKJY1107
Software Version : V00.00.01
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Sound Test
Ch 30
Ch 34
Ch 36
Ch 38
Ch 54
Ch 60
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Close
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
MENU
Prev.
Exit
Popup
1
2
3
4
Select Customer Support.
RED
Select Signal Test.
Display Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and
Software Version.
Display the information of Channel.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRODUCT/SERVICE INFORMATION
This function is a customer support function that can see product/service information and customer service center
information.
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
Close
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
1
2
3
Select Customer Support.
RED
Select Product/Service Info..
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to
return to normal TV viewing.
Display Model/Type, Software version, Serial Number,
Customer service center and Homepage.
• Press the BACK button to move
to the previous menu screen.
NETWORK TEST
Check the network status.
Network Status
TV
Software Update
Picture Test
Sound Test
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Network connecting
Signal Test
Product/Service Info.
Network Test
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Close
Setting
Test
Close
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
1
Select Customer Support.
RED
2
3
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to
return to normal TV viewing.
Select Network Test.
• Press the BACK button to move
to the previous menu screen.
Check the network status.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLE MANUAL
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
1
• RED : Go to the Index page.
Select Simple Manual.
GREEN
• BLUE : Play the Simple Manual automatically
or manually.
2
Select the part of the manual you want to see.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST
You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list.
Exit
Programme List
Mini Glossary
Displayed when the
1 BBC
Locked Programme.
2 BBC
3 BBC
4 BBC
A
5 BBC
Pr.Edit
• You may find some blue programmes.
■ Displaying programme LIST
These have been set up to be skipped by
auto programming or in the programme
edit mode.
1
Display the Programme List.
• Some programmes with the channel num-
ber shown in the programme LIST indicate
there is no station name assigned.
BLUE
Turn the programme edit.
■ Selecting a programme in the programme list
The mode will be switched
between TV, DTV, and Radio
from the programme you are
currently watching.
1
Select a programme.
2
Switch to the chosen programme number.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
■ Paging through a programme list
1
2
Return to normal TV viewing.
Turn the pages.
■ Displaying the favourite programme list
Exit
Favourite List
◄
►Favourite Pr. Group
◄
Group
B
►
1 BBC
2 BBC
3 BBC
Pr.Reg.
Pr.Edit
BLUE
Turn the programme edit.
1
Display the Favourite Programme List.
Current channel is registered/
cancelled as preferred channel on
currently selected Group.
YELLOW
Favourite group is changed.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT LIST
HDMI and AV1 (SCART) can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external
device approves voltage.
By using TV/RAD button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched pro-
gramme in DTV/RADIO/TV mode.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Input List
Move
OK
Antenna
RGB
USB1
USB2
AV1
AV2
Component
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
Input Label
Exit
1
• Antenna or Cable : Select it when watch-
ing the DTV/RADIO/TV.
Select the input source.
• USB : Select it when using USB depends
on connector.
• AV : Select it when watching the VCR or
external equipment.
• Component : Select it when using the
DVD or the Digital set-top box depends on
connector.
• RGB :Select it when using PC depends on
connector.
• HDMI : Select it when using DVD, PC or
Digital set-top box depend on connector.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
INPUT LABEL
Selects a label for each input source.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Input Label
Input List
Move
OK
AV1
◄
◄
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
►
►
AV2
Antenna
RGB
USB1
USB2
AV1
AV2
Component
Component
RGB
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI1
Input Label
Exit
▼
Close
1
2
3
Select Input Label.
BLUE
Select the source.
Select the label.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATA SERVICE
(This menu is enabled only in Ireland. )
This function allow users to choose between MHEG(Digital Teletext) and Teletext if both exist at the same
time.
If only one of them exists, either MHEG or Teletext is enabled regardless of which option you select-
ed.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: Ireland
Country
: Ireland
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Data Service
Factory Reset
Set ID
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Data Service
Factory Reset
Set ID
MHEG
: MHEG
:
Teletext
: 1
: 1
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.
Select Data Service.
Select MHEG or Teletext.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
MHP SERVICE
(Only 32/37/42LE48 , 32/37/42/47/55LE58 , 32/37/42/47/55LE78 ,
**
**
**
42/47LE7380, 42/47/55LE88 , 32/37/42LD48 , 32/37/42/47/55LD68 ,
** ** **
32/42/47LD78 , 32/37/42LD88 , 42/47LX68 , 47/55LX98 50/60PK78 ,
** ** ** **, **
50/60PK98 , 50/60PX98 )
** **
(This menu is enabled only in Italy and MHP services of the other contries may not work properly.)
This function is Auto Start function of MHP, Italian data broadcast.
Use in channel with MHP signal.
Data broadcast function may not be smooth due to situation from the broadcasting station.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: Italy
Country
: Italy
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
On
MHP Auto start
: Off
MHP Auto start
: O
Off
Factory Reset
Set ID
Factory Reset
Set ID
: 1
: 1
1
2
3
Select OPTION.
Select MHP Auto start.
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When MHP Auto Start is set to On
1
Display the MHP.
RED
■ When MHP Auto Start is set to Off
1
Display the MHP Application List.
2
Select your desired MHP broadcast.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLINK
This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo.
Please check the SIMPLINK logo.
This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function.
This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable
without additional cables and settings.
If you do not want SIMPLINK menu,select “Off”.
In wireless external output, SIMPLINK function is not supported.
OK
Exit
◄
On
Watch TV
►
DISC
VCR
HDD Recorder
Speaker
◄
►
TV Speaker
1
2
3
Display the SIMPLINK.
Select On or Off.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo.
Connect the HDMI/DVI IN 1(DVI), HDMI/DVI IN
1
2, HDMI/DVI IN 3 or HDMI IN 4 (Except for
32/37/42LD4 , 32/37/42/47/55LD6
,
***
32/42/47LD7 , 32/37/42LD8
***
) terminal on
***
***
the back of the TV and the HDMI output terminal
of the Home Theater using HDMI cables.
Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on
the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input
terminal of the Home Theater using optical
cables.
2
3
1
2
Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by
pushing the SIMPLINK button.
► When you select or operate a media device with
home theater function, the speaker automatically
switches to home theater speaker (HT speaker).
Home Theater
NOTE
► Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK
device with the HDMI cable.
► When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the opera-
tion of a device controlled by SIMPLINK.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLINK Functions
Disc playback
Control connected AV devices by pressing the
, OK, ►, , l l, ◄◄ and ►► buttons.
▀
Direct Play
After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional set-
tings.
Select AV device
Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it.
Power off all devices
When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
Switch audio-out
Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.
Sync Power on
When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically
to turn on mode.
* A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK,
does not provide this function.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an
High Speed HDMI Cable
(*CEC: Consumer Electronics Control).
with *CEC function should be used.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIMPLINK Menu
Press the
button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source.
1
TV viewing : Switch to the previous TV pro-
gramme regardless of the current mode.
OK
Exit
2
DISC playback : Select and play connected
discs.
◄
On
Watch TV
►
1
2
Selected Device
When multiple discs are available, the device
type of discs are conveniently displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
When a device is con-
nected (displayed in
bright colour)
DISC
VCR
3
4
5
When device is not con-
nected (displayed in
gray)
3
4
VCR playback : Play and control the con-
nected VCR.
HDD Recorder
Speaker
◄
►
TV Speaker
HDD Recordings playback : Play and con-
trol recordings stored in HDD.
Audio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to
TV: Select Home theater or TV speaker for
Audio Out.
5
• Home theater: Only one supported at a time
• DVD, Recorder: Up to three(Only 32/37/42LD4 , 32/37/42/47/55LD6 , 32/42/47LD7
*** ***
,
***
32/37/42LD8 ), four(Only 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 , 32/37/42/47/55LE7
,
*** ***
***
***
47/55LX9
42/47/55LE8 , 42/47LX6
***
50/60PK5 , 50/60PK7 , 50/60PK9 , 50/60PX9
)
***
***,
***,
** *** ***
supported at a time.
• VCR: Only one supported at a time
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
AV MODE
You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input.
Off
Disables the AV MODE.
Cinema or
Sport
Cinema
Optimizes video and audio for watching movies.
Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events.
Optimizes video and audio for playing games.
Game
Off
Cinema
Sport
or
Cinema
Game
1
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.
2
• If you select Cinema or
Cinema in AV mode, Cinema or
Cinema will be selected both for Picture Mode and Sound Mode in
PICTURE menu and AUDIO menu respectively.
• If you select “Off” in AV mode, the picture and image which you initially
set will be selected.
• When playing a video game using PlayStation or Xbox, it is recommended
to use the Game mode.
• When in Game mode, functions related to picture quality will be optimized for
playing games.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INITIALIZING(RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS)
This function initializes all settings.
But the settings of
Day and
Night of the Picture Mode cannot be initialized.
It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country.
When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup.
When the Lock System menu is "On", the message to enter the password appears.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: UK
Country
: UK
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Disability Assistance
Power Ind
All user settings and channel settings will
be reset. Still Continue?
●
●
●
●
●
●
Factory R
Set ID
: 1
Mode Setting
: Home Use
Mode Se
No
Yes
1
2
3
4
• In Lock System "On", if you forget your
password, press '0', '3', '2', '5' on the
remote control handset.
Select OPTION.
Select Factory Reset.
Select Yes.
Start Factory Reset.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETCAST
LEGAL NOTICE
Legal Notice
Page 1/3
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICE
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are
protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such
content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may
not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the
content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly
authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not copy,
upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute in
any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY
CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES,
NETWORK
Move
OK
• Network Setting : Wired
•
Network Status
: Internet is connected
• Legal Notice
▼
Close
1
2
3
Select NETWORK.
Select Legal Notice.
Check Legal notice.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK SERVICES
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are
provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the
foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may
not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute in any
manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY
CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR,
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY,
TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE
AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES,
INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR ANY CONTENT
OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access
may be disabled at any time, without notice, and LG makes no representation or warranty that any
content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted
by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which LG has no control. LG
may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without
notice or liability. LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption,
disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any
question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETCAST
NETCAST MENU
These services are provided by separate Content Provider.
Please visit the content providers web site for specific information on their services. (But, some content
manual maybe not provide depending on Content Provider).
NetCast menu source can differ by country.
Accu
YouTube Picasa
Weather
1
Select NETCAST menu option.
2
Enjoy the AccuWeather, Picasa or YouTube.
NOTE
►The videos list searched from the TV may different with the list searched from a web browser on PC.
►The settings of this TV do not affect the YouTube’s playback quality.
►The playback videos may be paused, stopped or buffering occurring often depending on your
broadband speed.
We recommend a minimum connection speed of 1.5 Mbps. For the best playback condition, a con-
nection speed of 4.0 Mbps is required. Sometimes your broadband speed varies based on your
ISP’s network conditions. Contact your ISP if you have problems maintaining a fast connection that
is reliable, or if you want to increase your connection speed. Many ISPs offer a variety of broadband
speed options.
► To view the owner’s manual that provided by the Content Provider, visit our website at http://www.lg.com.
► To see the activation method of Orange or maxdome, click the Orange, maxdome in the CD manual (Only
Frence or German).
► For service that requires log in, join the applicable service on the website using the PC and log in through
the TV to enjoy various additional functionalities.
► When you set the city you want with Setup by pressing the red button, the background of NetCast will be
set to the weather of the selected city.
► If there is no user action 2 minutes following freezing image or video on screen, the screensaver will acti-
vate itself preventing fixed image remaining on screen. (Plasma TV only)
• Press the RED button to select Weather of area.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
YOUTUBE
YouTube is a video sharing website where users can upload, view, and share video clips.
YouTube Screen Components
1
YouTube menu
1
2
2
Videos list
RED
Set the option menu.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
NOTE
► When you press the Q.menu button while the Youtube video is playing in full mode, you can set the video
options.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETCAST
YouTube Service menu
● Home: You can watch the popular video in real time.
● Featured: The featured videos list will be displayed.
● Popular: The best rated videos list from YouTube server will be displayed.
● Most Viewed: The most viewed videos list will be displayed.
● Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
● History: The videos list that you previously played will be displayed. Maximum of 20 videos can be
stored.
● Favorites: In sign-in status, this menu will be displayed the videos list that is arranged in the
YouTube server with your account (Some videos may not appear on the Favorites list, even if the
videos are arranged in the server).
● Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
Using the remote control
■
II
Stops the video and displays related videos list.
Pause the video while it is playing.
Play the selected video.
►
Skip the playback forward or backward.
Set the option menu.
RED
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACCUWEATHER
Accuweather is the programme to view the weather of the city the user wants.
AccuWeather Screen Components
1
AccuWeather menu
1
2
2
Weather list by city
3
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
3
RED
Change between Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Move the focus to the menu you want.
Select the focused menu.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
AccuWeather Service menu
● Home: The weather of selected city is displayed.
● Favorite City: Frequently checked cities can be registered to check the weather.
NOTE
►By default, New York, London and Paris are registered and the user can add/delete cities from
Favorite City.
►LG is not responsible for the accuracy of the weather forecast.
►Applicable weather information can differ from the actual weather depending on the information
provided by Accuweather.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETCAST
PICASA
Picasa is an application from Google that appreciates digital image files.
Picasa Screen Components
1
Picasa menu
2
Photos list
1
3
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
2
3
Select the desired photo.
The selected photo file is displayed.
Return to Netcast menu.
Return to TV viewing.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picasa Service menu
● Home: The featured photos list will be displayed.
● Friends: You can register users with the pictures you want as friends. You can add up to 10 friends.
● Search: The keypad/keyboard menu will be displayed.
● My Photos: You can view the pictures uploaded to the Web. This function can only be used when
you sign in.
● Sign in (Sign Out): Displays the keypad/keyboard menu to sign in or returns to the sign-out status.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
(Except for 32/37/42LE4 ,
***
*** ** *** ***
32/37/42/47/55LE5 , 42/47LE73 , 32/37/42LD4 , 32/37/42/47/55LD6 ,
32/42/47LD7 , 32/37/42LD8 , 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 , 50/60PK5 50/60PX9 )
***
***
***
***
**,
***
BLUETOOTH?
Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various types
of information devices such as computers, cell phones and PDAs, as well as digital appliances
through wireless connection, without having to connect any cable, to enable data exchange.
With the Bluetooth communication function, you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset
or receive images(only JPEG), listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV.
• Communication Spec.: Bluetooth Specification Version 2.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
• Output: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2
• Maximum Communication Range: Line of open sight approx. 10 m (30 ft)
• Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz band (2.4 GHz to 2.4835 GHz)
• Bluetooth Module: RBFS-B921A(Plasma TV), RBFS-B721A(LCD/LED LCD TV) (LG Electronics)
• Compatible Bluetooth Profile : GAVDP(Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile)
A2DP(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
HSP(Headset Profile)
OPP(Object Push Profile)
BIP(Basic Imaging Profile)
FTP(File Transfer Profile)
Precautions when using the Bluetooth
► Use within 7 m (-45° to 45°) range.
► If you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles, it can result in communication
error.
► Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices.
► Products using the same frequency of 2.4 GHz (Wireless LAN, microwave oven etc.), can cause communi-
cation error by using the same frequency bandwidth.
► The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation.
► The probability of search increases with less number of devices.
► Electromagnetic wave can be interfered with applicable wireless devices.
► Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference, they cannot
provide services related to human life.
► You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time.
► You cannot receive photos(only JPEG) or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the
Bluetooth headset.
► For details of Bluetooth, refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device.
► Operation is subject to the following two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
► Bluetooth can be used about 30 seconds after the power is turned on.
► Depending on the transmission processing method and performance of the headset used, the audio can be
instantly disconnected.
QDID(Qualified Design Identity) : B015199
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTING THE BLUETOOTH
If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images
from an external device and view them on the TV, listen to music from cell phone(Bluetooth device),
you can use the wireless communication without having to connect any cables.
You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting “Bluetooth on”.
If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function, select “Bluetooth off”.
If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device, you can select “Bluetooth off” after disconnecting
the device.
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
OK
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
Bluetooth on
Bluetooth is off.
Select 'Bluetooth On' on the left to turn on Bluetooth.
NETWORK
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
BLUETOOTH
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
1
2
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select Bluetooth on.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
BLUETOOTH HEADSET
When you select the Bluetooth headset, you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset
through wireless communication.
You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use. For details, refer to the user manu-
al of the applicable device.
A maximum of 12 devices can be paired.
When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset, other buttons except for the “Stop” (OK button)
do not work.
Connecting a new Bluetooth headset
You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the Disconnected condition.
When you run the search, it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding.
After new Bluetooth device is searched, the PIN number is validated to connect the device. For
details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.
Searching Bluetooth headset
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
OK
1/1
42LH70YD-SE
New
Bluetooth off
No Bluetooth device.
Search headset
My Info
Stop searching
1
2
3
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select Search headset.
Select the desired Bluetooth
headset.
Select the desired Bluetooth headset
PIN number. Refer to the user manual
of the applicable device for the PIN
number.
4
5
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered
Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed
at the top.
When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered, you can select and connect directly
without any PIN validation.
Exit
Bluetooth
Move
OK
Exit
OK
Bluetooth
Move
Bluetooth off
1/1
Bluetooth headset is connected.
Bluetooth off
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Disconnect
DR-BT140Q
PLT 510
sgh-e760
No device
Search headset
My Info
Remove device
My Info
1
2
3
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select the desired Bluetooth headset.
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
• After connecting/using the Bluetooth headset, the headset setting will be the Disconnected condi-
tion automatically when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on.
• After connecting the Bluetooth headset, the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the
sound will only be generated from the headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use
Exit
Exit
OK
Bluetooth
Move
OK
Bluetooth
Move
Bluetooth off
Bluetooth off
Bluetooth headset is connected.
Do you want to disconnect headset?
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
Disconnect
Cancel
Disconnect
Disconnect
My Info
My Info
1
Select BLUETOOTH.
2
Select Disconnect.
3
4
Select Disconnect.
Disconnect the Bluetooth headset.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset
When the Bluetooth menu is "On" and there is a connection request
from the headset, this message is displayed.
Not all headsets support the this feature.(Refer to the user manual of
the applicable Bluetooth headset.)
Do you want to use your headset?
Yes
No
Some headset types may make an attempt at connection when they
are turned off/on even though they are not included in the
Registered Device list.
1
Select Yes or No.
NOTE
►Connection that is lost due to the TV being
turned off etc. will not be automatically recov-
ered. Try connecting the applicable device
again.
►LG recommends the following headset mod-
els.
-Plantronics VOYAGER-855 / SONY HBH-
DS970, HBH-DS980 / Motorola S605
There might be an audio delay, depending on
the buffer memory size of the headset.
►The stereo/mono headset officially certified
to be Bluetooth compatible can be searched
and connected.
►The stereo/mono headset that supports the
A2DP or HSP function among the Bluetooth
devices can be connected.
►If the surrounding environment of the TV is
as follows, the device may not be searched
or connected properly.
►Some operations can be slower while operat-
ing the headset.
►Even if you choose simplink Home Theater
after using the headset during Simplink opera-
tion, the unit will not automatically switch to
Home Theater speakers.
►When the headset connection continuously
fails, pair the device one more time.
►The audio quality of mono headsets will not be
as good as that for stereo headsets.
►Mono headsets may suffer from noise as the
distance from the TV increases, because they
use a different transmission method compared
with stereo headsets.
►When a Bluetooth headset is in use, the
Volume +/- and Mute keys do not work, and
the Audio menu returns to the default value
and is disabled.
►With Bluetooth set to On, if any registered
devices are turned on, the TV will switch to
Bluetooth mode automatically even though you
are watching in another input mode. In this
case, set Bluetooth to Off.
-If there is strong electromagnetic wave.
-If there are many Bluetooth devices.
-If the headset is turned off, not in place or
has an error.
-Because products such as microwave oven,
wireless LAN, plasma light, gas range etc.,
use the same frequency range, it can cause
communication error.
►Only one Bluetooth headset can be connect-
ed at once.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
REMOVE THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
When 12 devices are registered, you cannot register any more devices, and the external device will no
longer be able to pair up with the TV. In this case, you should delete one (disconnect first if a device is
connected to the TV) and then you can register another device.
"Remove device" will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV.
Exit
OK
Exit
OK
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Move
Move
1/1
Bluetooth off
Bluetooth off
Do you want to delete the selected Bluetooth
device?
PLT 510
00:19:7f:ff:4a:1a
DR-BT140Q
PLT 510
sgh-e760
No device
Delete
Cancel
Search headset
Search headset
My Info
Remove device
My Info
1
2
3
4
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select Remove device.
Select Delete.
RED
Remove the Bluetooth device.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION
This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user.
"Edit" will be available when TV is not connected with any device.
You can edit the Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name.
You can check the TV address.
To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device,
the PIN needs to be entered.
For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device, refer to the user manual of the
applicable device.
The TV PIN is composed of numbers of up to 16 digits.
The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit.
Exit
Exit
OK
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Move
My Info
1/1
Bluetooth off
Bluetooth off
Setup TV PIN.
0000
GLOBAL-PLAT2
Setup TV name.
DR-BT140Q
PLT 510
sgh-e760
No device
TV address
00:05:c9:51:06:f3
Search headset
Search headset
Close
Remove device
My Info
1
2
• Press the DELETE button to delete digits
one by one.
Select BLUETOOTH.
Select My Info.
BLUE
3
4
5
Select Setup TV PIN or Setup TV name.
You can use an the alphabet A to Z,
the number 0 to 9, +/ -, and blank.
Save.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH
DEVICE
For details on how to send photos(only JPEG) from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the
user manual of the applicable device.
Receiving picture(s)
Cancel
◄
►
1/2
Rotate
Hide
Exit
< >
When you select Hide with the ꕌꕍ button, the OSD will disappear.
•
And when you press the OK button again, it will appear again.
Select the desired photos.
(Rotate) : Rotate photos.
■ Rotates the photo 90° clockwise upon OK button on (Rotate).
• The maximum accumulated size of the image(s) that can be received is 10MBytes.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while using the Bluetooth headset.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while listening to music from Bluetooth device.
• When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo, press the BACK button to stop
receiving the photo. All photos already received will be deleted as a result.
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to transmit an image (JPEG) file to the TV set.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL
BLUETOOTH DEVICE
For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user
manual of the applicable device.
You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2DP(as external device).
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to listen to music via the TV speaker system.
• With some Bluetooth device, the sound can be slow or discontinued from time to time.
Listening to bluetooth music...
Press any key to finish.
• Press the
+ or - button to adjust the volume.
• If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
• Press the BACK button to return to normal TV viewing.
NOTE
► You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset.
► You cannot listen to music while receiving image(s).
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3D IMAGING
(Only 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9 )
***
***
***
3D TECHNOLOGY
This TV can display in 3D via 3D broadcasting or when the TV is connected to a compatible device, such as
a Blu-ray 3D Player. You need such a device to watch the TV in 3D. The 3D TV displays two separate pictures
formatted for each eye. The viewer needs to wear 3D glasses in order to see these images in 3D format.
Viewing 3D Imaging
WARNING
►When viewing 3D images, it is important to watch
the TV from an effective viewing angle and within
the appropriate distance. The appropriate angle is
120°(when the viewing distance is 2m (6.5 ft)) and
distance is 2m – 7m (6.5ft – 22.9ft). If you exceed
this viewing angle or distance, you may not be
able to view the 3D imaging.
If you or anybody from your family has a history of
epilepsy or seizure, please consult with your doc-
tor before watching 3D TV.
If you experience any dizziness or light headed-
ness, visual transition or altered vision, visual or fa-
cial instability, such as eye or muscle twitching, un-
conscious action, convulsion, loss of conscience,
confusion or disorientation, loss of directional
sense, cramps, or nausea immediately stop watch-
ing the 3D imaging and consult a doctor. Parents
should monitor their children, including teenagers,
for these symptoms as they may be more sensitive
to the effects of watching 3D TV.
Further 3D images may not be displayed if they
are viewed while you are lying down. (LCD TV/
LED LCD TV only)
►If you watch the 3D images too closely or for a
long period of time, it may harm your eyesight. If
you feel any sort of eyestrain stop viewing the 3D
images remove the 3D glasses and rest.
►Watching the TV or playing video games that incor-
porate 3D images with the 3D glasses for a long
period of time can cause drowsiness, headaches
or fatigue to you and/or your eyes. If you experi-
ence any of these symptoms stop viewing the 3D
TV remove the 3D glasses and rest.
Risk of photosensitization seizure can be reduced
with the following actions.
- Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV.
- For those who have vision that is different in
each eye, they should watch the TV after taking
vision correction measures.
- Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the same
level as the 3D screen and refrain from sitting too
closely to the TV
- Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or sick,
and avoid watching the 3D imaging for a long pe-
riod of time.
- Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other pur-
pose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D TV.
- Some viewers may feel disoriented after watch-
ing 3D TV. Therefore, after you watch 3D TV,
take a moment to regain awareness of your situ-
ation before moving.
►Pregnant woman, seniors, persons with heart
problems or persons who experience frequent
drowsiness should refrain from watching 3D TV.
►
►
►
Do not use the 3D imaging or 3D glasses whilst walking
or moving around. Using the 3D imaging and glasses
while moving around may result in injuries due to run-
ning into objects, tripping and/or falling.
Some 3D imaging may cause you to duck or dodge
the image displayed in the video. Therefore, it is
best if you do not watch 3D TV near fragile objects
or near any objects that can be knocked over easily.
Please prevent children under the age of 5 from watching
3D TV. It may affect their vision development.
►Warning for photosensitization seizure:
Some viewers may experience a seizure or epi-
lepsy when exposed to certain factors, including
flashing lights or image as in TV or video games.
NOTE
►To watch the TV in 3D, you must put on your 3D ►Do not use the TV in close proximity to other elec-
glasses. For best results, you should wear LG
tronic equipment and IR equipment.
Brand 3D glasses. The 3D imaging may not dis- ►In Analog TV, 3D Imaging does not work.
play properly when using another brand of 3D ►When watching 2D images, it is recommended to
glasses. Please see the 3D glasses manual for
instructions on how to use the 3D glasses.
take off the 3D glasses. If you watch 2D images with
the 3D glasses on, you may see distorted images.
►After powering on the TV, a few seconds may be ►When watching digital TV in 3D imaging mode,
needed for your TV to calibrate.
monitor out signals cannot be output through
the SCART cable.
► It may take a moment for you to see the 3D imag-
ing if you look away from the TV and then revert
your eyes back to the 3D program.
If you set the 3D mode to On while a scheduled
recording is performed on digital TV, monitor out
signals cannot be output through the SCART
cable, and the recording cannot be performed.
►The TV may flicker slightly if the 3D imaging is dis-
played under 3 wavelength lamp fluorescent light
(50 Hz - 60 Hz) or magnetic fluorescent lamp (50
Hz - 60 Hz). In such instances, it is recommended
to turn the lights off.
►If there is an obstacle between the TV and the 3D
glasses, the 3D imaging may not display properly.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN USING 3D GLASSES
►3D glasses are sold separately. Refer to the 3D glasses manual for operating instructions.
►Do not use the 3D glasses to replace your corrective glasses, sunglasses or protective goggles.
►Do not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold locations.
►Do not drop objects onto the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the glasses.
►Since the lenses of the 3D glasses are easily scratched, make sure to clean only with a soft cloth.
Shake off any dust before using the cloth since the glasses are easily scratched.
3D IMAGING VIEWING RANGE
TV size, viewing angle & other circumstances may change the viewing distance and the angle of view.
TV
Viewing
2 m - 7 m
Distance
◦
◦
60 60
2 m
2 m
120 º
Viewing
Angle
(When the viewing distance is 2 m)
7 m
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3D IMAGING
WATCHING 3D IMAGING
Play the video produced in 3D.
Refer to the following for the supported imaging.
1
Horizontal
Vertical
Signal
720p
Resolution
Playable 3D video format
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Frequency (kHz) Frequency (Hz)
45
89.9/90
37.5
60
HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D),
Frame Packing
59.94/60
1280x720
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
50
HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D),
Frame Packing
75
33.75
60
50
1080i
1920X1080
1920X1080
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
28.125
HDMI
Input
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board,
67.50
60
Single Frame Sequential
56.250
27
50
24
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
1080p
HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D),
Frame Packing
53.95/54
33.75
23.98/24
30
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board
Top & Bottom, Side by Side,
Checker Board, MPO(Photo)
1080p
720p
1920X1080
1280x720
1920x1080
33.75
30
USB Input
44.96
45.00
37.50
59.94
60.00
50.00
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
Component
Input
(Plasma TV
Only)
33.72
33.75
59.94
60.00
50.00
1080i
28.125
Signal
720p, 1080i
Playable 3D video format
Top & Bottom, Side by Side
DTV
For 3D video feed that is input in the HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D) Frame Packing format, it is automatically
switched to 3D.
Media contents and a player need to support HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D) Frame Packing to play in 3D.
Video, which is input as HDMI (V. 1.4 with 3D) Frame Packing format, is switched into the 3D screen
Frame
Sequential
automatically.
To turn on 3D Mode, select this icon.
2
After selecting the shape as
shown in the screen on TV,
wear the 3D glasses.
►
►
Move
OK
Exit
Checker Board
2D video
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
or
To turn on 3D Mode, select this thumbnail.
3D video
Select 3D video or 2D video.
After selecting the shape as
shown in the screen on TV,
wear the 3D glasses.
Frame
Sequential
►
►
Move
OK
Exit
Checker Board
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
• 3D video : Select it to view the 3D imaging.
• 2D video : Select it to view the 2D imaging.
Changed from 2D
imaging to 3D imaging
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Select Setting Left/Right or Left/Right image change.
or
Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best
3D view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you, change to left/right image of
Power on your 3D glasses and put them on.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
Power on your 3D glasses and put them on.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
or
or
Cancel
OK
Cancel
OK
glasses with
button.)
3D effect setting : 10
Left/Right image change
OK
• In case of this OSD (On Screen
Display), you can adjust the 3D
Setting Left/Right
effect setting with using
button.
3D
End 3D video
4
Select Left/Right or Right/Left.
Select the screen with 3D video with better visibility.
or
Setting Left/Right
Left/Right
Right/Left
3D mode setting
3D effect
OK
10 ◄
►
◄
►
Left/Right
or
or
3D
End 3D video
Exit
End 3D video
End 3D video
OK
• Press the 3D button to return to normal TV viewing.
NOTE
►
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
If you select 3D mode, "Power indicator" is turned off automatically.
►
►
While watching 3D imaging, you cannot adjust video/audio settings using the menu. (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
Some menus may not work while watching the TV in 3D.
►You can only choose "Standard → Cinema → Game" with the AV MODE button on remote control.
AV Mode is set as Standard while playing in
. (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
3D
►If used 3D effect on the 2D source, 3D may not work.
The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically when switching DTV channels.
►The screen may not be displayed properly if you view 2D DTV images in 3D imaging mode.
3D effect can be seen when 3D Mode is selected appropriately for the 3D input signal supplied to the TV.
►Energy Saving is disabled while playing in
►
►
.
3D
►For MPO files (3D camera files), the 3D imaging mode is enabled automatically.
►
If you'd like to play the BGM using *.mpo file(3D camera file), In advance, the contents path for BGM should
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
be set on full-sized photo view screen which isn't *.mpo file(3D camera file).
►
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
Picture mode is set as Standard, Energy Saving Off if entering to 3D mode.
NOTES FOR VIEWING 3D IMAGE WITH 3D BROADCASTING (* In Analog TV, 3D Imaging does not work.)
When switching the 2D image display to the
ꔛ
Disable the 3D imaging mode with the 3D button.
3D image display with the 3D button on the
ꔛ
The 3D imaging mode is disabled automatically if
remote control, the overlapped image may be
you change the channel.
displayed.
ꔛ
This channel supports the 3D imaging mode.
If the screen is divided into
Select the 3D imaging type displayed on the
left/right or top/bottom when
screen by pressing the 3D button on the remote
you change the channel
control.
ꔛ
Press the L/R SELECT button on the remote con-
If your eyes are sore or the screen looks blurry
trol and select L/R or R/L, which you find better for
while viewing 3D images
viewing 3D images.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
WHEN CONNECTING A USB DEVICE
When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically.
“POP UP MENU” will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activat-
ed or while the Bluetooth Headset is connected.
When the Pop Up menu appears, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List in the MY MEDIA menu.
In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.
After choosing the desired type of media, choose a device to open files from. The options are: USB
device or DLNA.
1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1
• Only photo(JPEG, MPO(Only 42/47LX6
,
***
)), music (MP3) and
or USB IN 2 jack on the TV.
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
***
***
movie(DAT, MPG, MPEG, VOB, AVI, DIVX, MP4,
MKV, TS, TRP, TP, ASF, WMV) are supported.
or
When removing the USB device
Select the USB Device menu before removing
the USB device.
1
2
Select Movie List, Photo List or
Music List.
Select USB Device.
2
Select Eject.
MY MEDIA
Movie List
Photo List
Music List
Press OK( ) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
NOTE
Exit
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
►In order to avoid losing the USB memory stick,
use the USB connector(sold separately) to fix
the USB memory stick to the USB connector
holder of the TV. (Plasma TV only)
3
Select the desired device.
4BLUE
USB connector holder
Search other network device.
Please select the device.
USB Label
USB Label
DLNA
USB
Input Port
USB Connector (sold separately)
- Fix the one end of the USB connector to
the USB memory stick and the other end
to the USB connector holder.
Device Selection
Search
Previous
•
Press the BACK button to move to the previous
menu screen.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions when using the USB device
►Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
►If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable.
►A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized.
►A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
►The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
►Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working.
When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be
damaged.
►Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The
device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB stor-
age device which has normal music files, image files or movie files.
►Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system
provided with the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility
programme which is not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized.
►Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5 A) which requires an external power supply. If
not, the device may not be recognized.
►Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker.
►Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly.
►File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100
English characters.
►Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We
will not be responsible for any data loss.
►
If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to
connect the external power source. - Please use a power adaptor for an external power source. We do not guar-
antee an USB cable for an external power source.
►If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use
up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.
► If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected.
► If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it.
► How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device.
►If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is
turned on.
►The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB
memory.
►Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly.
►If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on
again to make it work properly.
►USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the
movie list.
►Maximum of 999 folders or files can be recognized under one folder.
►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
DLNA
About DLNA
This TV can display and play many types of movie, photo and music files from your DLNA server and
has been certified by DLNA for photos.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics,
computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing
of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA
server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this TV, some setting changes of
software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software
or device for more information.
Please refer to pages 93 to 127 for additional information on supported file types and other instructions.
NOTE
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM is a customized software edition only for
sharing files and folders to this TV.
►The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials software does not support following functions:
Transcoding, Remote UI, TV control, Internet services and Apple iTunes
►This manual explains operations with the English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as
examples. Follow the explanation referring to the actual operations of your language version.
►
►
If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
For the DLNA option, use the Nero MediaHome programme that is provided with the TV. However, we
cannot guarantee that third party programmes will work perfectly.
►
You can select a channel while viewing the small preview channel list on your TV screen.
►Check your network settings when the DLNA option does not work properly.
►If there is an abnormal operation or an error occurs in Nero Media Home, the DLNA option may
not work properly. In this case, exit Nero Media Home and restart the programme. You can down-
load the latest version of Nero Media Home by clicking the question mark at the bottom-left of the
programme.
►When the network is unstable, the device may be slower or may need to load during playback.
►When playing a video in DLNA mode, the Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are not supported.
►When selecting Full Screen in DLNA mode, the ratio of the outputted screen may differ from the
original.
►When more than one TV is connected to a single server in DLNA mode, a file may not play properly,
depending on the server performance.
►If the play time information is not provided by the server, it is displayed as "--:--:--."
►When using Movie List, DRM
files in the DLNA server cannot be played.
/*.tp /*.trp
►The *.MPO file in DLNA server is not played when Photo List is in operation.
►
DLNA operation may not work properly according to the AP manufacturers.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is easy to use DLNA server software for Windows.
Requirement PC system before you install Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
■ Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required),
Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005 (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows Server® 2003
■ Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application runs in 32-bit mode)
■ Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome stand-
alone
■ 1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD Sempron™ 2200+ processors
■ Memory: 256 MB RAM
■ Graphics card with at least 32 MB video memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels, and
16-bit colour settings
■ Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
■ DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or higher
■ Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet, WLAN (IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) (IEEE 802.11 n: Except for
Russia)
Start up your computer, and insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your compu-
ter’s CD-ROM drive.
1
An installation wizard will walk you through the quick and uncomplicated installation process.
Close all Microsoft Windows programmes and exit any anti-virus software that may be running.
2
Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
3
Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The installation is prepared and the installation wizard
appears.
4
Click the Next button to display the serial number input screen.
5
Click Next to go to the next step.
If you accept all conditions, click I accept the License Conditions check box and click Next.
Installation is not possible without this agreement.
6
Click Typical and click Next. The installation process is started.
7
If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data, select the check box and click the Next
button.
8
Click the Exit button to complete the installation.
9
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add folders you wish to share.
Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials icon on the desktop.
1
Click Network icon on the left and define your network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by your TV.
2
Click Shares icon on the left.
3
Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.
4
Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window.
5
Select the folder containing the files you want to share. The selected folder is added to the list of
shared folders.
6
Click Start Server icon to start the server.
7
NOTE
►If the shared folders or files are not displayed on the TV, click the folder on the Local Folders
tab and click Rescan Folder at the More button.
►Visit www.nero.com for more information and software tools.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back shared contents
You can display and play movie, photo and music content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.
1Start the server on your computer or other device that connected on your home network.
2
Select MY MEDIA.
3
Select Movie List, Photo List or Music List.
Select the DLNA.
4
Depending on the media server, this TV may need to get the permission from
the server.
If you want to re-scan available media server, press blue colour button.
NOTE
►To play the file on the media server, the TV and the media server must be connected to the same
access point.
►Because the compatibility and available playback functions on the MY MEDIA menu are tested
on the bundle DLNA server (Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials) environment, file requirements and
playback functions on the MY MEDIA may differ depending on media servers.
►The file requirements on this page are not always compatible. There may have some restrictions
by file features and media server’s ability.
►Even the files that are not supported can be displayed in photo thumbnail or music thumbnail.
►Movie thumbnail is not supported in DLNA Movie.
►If there is an unplayable music file in the MY MEDIA menu, the TV will skip the file and play next
file.
►The file information indicated on the screen may not always correct for music and movie files in
MY MEDIA menu.
►This TV only supports movie subtitle files supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
►The subtitle file name and movie file name have to be the same and located at the same folder.
►If subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already, the user has to
remove and re-add the folder to the list of shares.
►The playback and operating quality of the MY MEDIA function may be affected by your home net-
work condition.
►The files from removable media such as USB drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media server may not
share properly.
►When playing the Media through DLNA connection, it does not support the DivX file play which is
protected by DRM.
►Up to 200 folders in one folder and 999 including folders and files can be recognized.
►If there are too many folders and files in one folder, it may not operate properly.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
MOVIE LIST
You can play movie files on a USB or PC storage device.
The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV.
Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play.
Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files.
It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
Movie(*.mpg/*.mpeg/*.dat/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mov/*.mkv/*.dvix/*.avi/*.asf/*.wmv/*.avi(motion-jpeg)/*.mp4(motion-
jpeg)/*.mkv(motion-jpeg))supporting file
Video format : DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03, Xvid1.10 beta-1/beta-2,
Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264/AVC, VC1, JPEG, Sorenson H.263
Audio format : Dolby Digital, AAC, Mpeg, MP3, LPCM, HE-AAC, ADPCM, WMA
Bit rate : within 32 kbps to 320 kbps(MP3)
External Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD,Subviewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivX)
Internal Subtitle format : only, XSUB (It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files)
• Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.
• Some special characters are not supported in subtitles.
• HTML tags are not supported in subtitles.
• Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available.
• Changing font and colour in subtitles is not supported.
• Subtitles in languages other than one specified are not supported.
• Video files with subtitle files of 1 MB or larger may not be played properly.
• The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the audio language is
changed.
• A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable.
• Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.
• If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is outputted.
• HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depending on the frame.
• Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work properly depending on
the frame.
• Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.
• Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps.
• We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.
• DTS Audio codec is not supported.
• A movie file more than 30 GB in file size is not supported for playback.
• A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.
• A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.
• Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.
• The movie file encoded by the GMC (Global Motion Compensation) and Qpel (Quarterpel Motion Estimation) is not
supported.
• When you are watching the movie by Movie List function, you can adjust an image by Energy Saving and AV Mode
key on the remote control. User setup for each image mode does not operate.
• Trick Mode does not support other functions than ►► if video files do not have index information.
• When playing video file using network, the Trick mode is limited to 2-times speed.
• Video file names that contain special characters may not be playable.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supported DivX file
File Extensions
A/V
Video
Audio
Explanation
Codec
Profile/Level Support
Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
VC-1 Advanced Profile
Only streams compliant
to SMPTE 421M VC-1
standard are supported.
Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 1080p30)
VC-1 Simple and Main
Profiles
.asf
.wmv
WMA Standard
WMA 9 Professional
DivX3.11
Global motion com-
pensation or quar-
terpel motion esti-
mation does not
supported. Streams
using this syntax are
not supported.
DivX4
DivX5
DivX6
Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
XViD
Video
.divx
.avi
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
H.264 / AVC
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-1Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III(MP3)
Dolby Digital
Audio
Video
Global motion
compensation or
quarterpel motion
estimation does
not supported.
Streams using this
syntax are not sup-
ported.
Most of the MKV
content available is
encoded by the open
source x264 codec.
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
H.264 / AVC
.mp4
.m4v
Advanced Simple Profile (e.g.
720p/1080i)
MPEG-4 Part 2
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
Audio
Video
AAC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
H.264 / AVC
.mkv
AAC
Dolby Digital
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
Audio
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
H.264 / AVC
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Simple Profile@Medium Level
(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 1080p30)
Advanced Profile@Level3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Video
Only streams com-
pliant to SMPTE
.ts
.trp
.tp
VC-1
421M VC-1 stand-
ard are supported.
MPEG-1Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III(MP3)
Dolby Digital
Audio
Video
AAC-LC and HE-AAC
AAC
MPEG-1
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level (e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
.vob
Dolby Digital
MPEG-1Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM
Audio
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
MPEG-1
Only streams compliant
configured properly for
TS, PS or ES
Video
Audio
.mpg
97
MPEG-1Layer I, II
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Screen Components
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
2
1
Select Movie List.
Select MY MEDIA.
2
1
1
2
3
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Page 1/1
Movie List
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
5
4
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
001
002
006
003
004
4
5
Contents under the folder
005
1
focused on
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
1
focused on
MARK
Exit
Move
Play
P
Page Change
Mark
To Photo List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
3
• Some files may be displayed
the preview image by icon
only.
• Non-supported files are
displayed the preview
image by icon only.
• Abnormal files are
displayed in the
form of bitmap.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Movie Selection
■ When playing movie files
Page 1/1
Movie List
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
001
002
006
003
004
051. Apple_ ......
02:30:25
005
MARK
Mark
Move
Play
P
Page Change
Exit
To Photo List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
1
2
3
• Use the P
movie page.
button to navigation in the
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired movie title.
Movie files are played.
Using the remote control
RED
Change device.
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Photo List->Music List.
YELLOW
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
BLUE
Convert to Mark Mode.
Return to normal TV viewing.
EXIT
( )
Press the PLAY ► button to return to normal playback.
►
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■ When selected movie files are played
Page 1/1
Movie List
Mark Mode
USB1 External
Page 1/1
Drive1
001
005
002
006
003
004
051. Apple_ ......
02:30:25
MARK
Mark
Move
Mark
P
Page Change
Exit
Mark All
Unmark All
Exit Mark Mode
Play Marked
1
2
3
• When one or more movie files are
marked, the marked movies will
be played in sequence.
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired movie title.
Convert to Mark Mode.
Mark desired Movie file.
BLUE
RED
or
4
5
Marked movie file is played.
NOTE
► In the case of files not supported, a message regarding non-supported file is displayed.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the remote control
Play the selected movie file.
Once a movie file finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically.
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
EXIT
Mark all movie files on the screen.
Deselect all marked movie files.
Exit the Mark Mode.
Return to normal TV viewing.
NOTE
►If you select “Yes” from OSD when playing the same file after the movie file has been stopped, it
will restart where it stopped previously.
►If continuous series files exist within the folder, the next file will automatically be played.
But, this excludes cases when the Repeat function of Movie List Option is turned “On” (Refer to
p. 104) or when set as Marked Play.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the Movie List function, play
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
Choose options.
Set Video Play.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
Close
◄►
►
01:02:30 / 02:30:25
Q.MENU
Option
Hide
Exit
■
►
II ◄◄ ►►
1
2
or
Show the Option menu.
Select Set Video Play., Set Video., Set Audio. or Set 3D video.(Only 42/47LX6
***,
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9 ).
*** ***
NOTE
► Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
► Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
► When replaying the video file after stopping, you can play from where it stopped previously.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the remote control
■
Stop the playing movie file.
( )
Press the PLAY ► button to return to normal playback.
►
( )
During playback, press the Pause II button.
■ Still screen is displayed.
II
■ If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the
TV returns to the playback state.
( )
■ Press the Pause II button and then use the FF(►►) button for slow motion.
When playing,
(
)
repeatedly, press the REW ◄◄ button to speed up ◄◄(x2) -> ◄◄◄(x4) ->
◄◄◄◄(x8) ->◄◄◄◄◄(x16) ->◄◄◄◄◄◄(x32) .
repeatedly, press the FF ►► button to speed up ►►(x2)-> ►►►(x4) ->
►►►►(x8) ->►►►►►(x16) -> ►►►►►►(x32).
(
)
◄◄ / ►►
■ Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed.
Q.MENU
MENU
or
Show the Option menu.
Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press OK button to display.
BACK
Return to normal TV viewing.
EXIT
<
>
■ When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can
< >
be viewed on the screen.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 138)
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 66)
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Video Play,
Set Video Play.
Picture Size
◄
◄
►
►
Full
1
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
● Language
● Code page
● Sync
◄
►
On
English
Default
0
◄
◄
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
►
►
● Position
0
● Size
Normal
Repeat
◄
►
On
Previous
1
2
Select Picture Size, Audio Language, Subtitle Langugae or Repeat.
Make appropriate adjustments.
Subtitle Language
Support Language
►Picture Size : Selects your desired picture
format during movie play.
►Audio Language : Changes the Language
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish,
Finnish, Dutch, Portuguese, Danish, Romanian,
Norwegian, Albanian, Gaelic, Welsh, Irish,
Catalan,Valencian
Latin1
Files
Group of the audio during movie play.
with a single audio track cannot be selected.
►Subtitle Langugae
Bosnian, Polish, Croatian, Czech,
Latin2
: Turn on/off the subtitle.
Slovak, Slovenian, Serbian, Hungarian
►Language : Activated for SMI subtitle and
Latin4
Cyrillic
Greek
Turkish
Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian
can select the language within the subtitle.
Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakh
►Code page : Can select the font for subti-
tle. When set to default, same font as gen-
eral menu will be used.
Greek
Turkish
►Sync : Adjusts the time synchronisation of
the subtitle from -10 secs to +10 secs by
steps of 0.5 secs during movie play.
►Position : Changes the position of the subtitle
either up or down during movie play.
►Size : Selects your desired Subtitle size
during movie play.
►Repeat : Turn on/off repeat function of
movie playback. When turned on, the file
within the folder will be played back
repeatedly. Even when the repeated play-
back is turned off, it can run the playback if
the file name is similar to the previous file.
NOTE
►Only 10,000 of sync blocks can be supported within the subtitle file.
104
►When playing a video, you can adjust the Picture Size by pressing the RATIO button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When you select the Set Video,
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
PLASMA TV Only
Set Video.
Set Video.
Picture Mode
Picture Mode
◄
◄
►
►
◄
◄
◄
►
►
Standard
Standard
● Contrast
100
50
● Backlight
● Contrast
● Brightness
● Colour
70
● Brightness
◄
100
50
● Sharpness
● Colour
● Tint
50
60
0
◄
◄
►
►
◄
◄
►
►
60
● Dynamic Contrast
● Edge Enhancer
● Noise Reduction
R
G
C
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
Medium
High
● Colour Temp.
0
W
Medium
● Noise Reduction
◄
►
Low
TruMotion
◄
►
Low
Picture Reset
Previous
Picture Reset
Previous
1
2
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 139 to 148)
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Audio,
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◄
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
►
Standard
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Balance
Off
Off
L
R
0
Previous
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or Balance.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 154 to 158)
■ When you select the Set 3D video, (Only 42/47LX6
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
***
)
***
***,
Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best
3D view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you, change to left/right image of
Power on your 3D glasses and put them on.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
Power on your 3D glasses and put them on.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
glasses with
button.)
or
or
OK
Cancel
OK
Cancel
OK
3D effect setting : 10
Left/Right image change
Setting Left/Right
3D
End 3D video
For more information, see the 3D Imaging section in the Owner's Manual.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHOTO LIST
You can view photo files on USB or PC storage device.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.
When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function, you can not change the picture mode.
PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file
Baseline : 64 x 64 to 15360 x 8640
Progressive : 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440
• You can play JPEG files only.
• Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
• An error message occurs for corrupted files or file formats that cannot be played.
• Corrupted image files may not be displayed properly.
• It may take some time to view high-resolution images in full screen.
Only 42/47LX6
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
***
***,
***
File
Extensions
Item
Profile
SOF0: baseline
supproted file format
SOF1: Extend Sequential
SOF2: Progressive
jpeg
jpg
2D
3D
Min: 64 x 64
jpe
photo size
Max - Normal Type: 15360 (W) x 8640 (H)
Progressive Type: 1920 (W) x 1440 (H)
supproted file format
mpo
4:3 size: 3,648 x 2,736
2,592 x 1,944
mpo
photo size
2,048 x 1,536
3:2 size: 3,648 x 2,432
Screen Components
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
2
1
Select Photo List.
Select MY MEDIA.
2
1
1
2
3
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
Page 1/1
Photo List
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
5
4
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
001
010
002
003
012
004
013
005
014
006
015
007
008
009
4
5
Contents under the folder
1
focused on
011
Current page/ total pages of
contents under the folder
1
focused on
MARK
Mark
Move
View
P
Page Change
Exit
To Music List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
3
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Photo Selection
■ When playing photo files
Page 1/1
Photo List
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
001
010
002
003
012
004
013
005
014
006
015
007
008
009
011
MARK
Move
View
P
Page Change
Mark
Exit
To Music List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
1
2
3
• Use the P
photo page.
button to navigation in the
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired photos.
Photo files are displayed.
Using the remote control
RED
Change device.
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Music List->Movie List.
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
Convert to Mark Mode.
YELLOW
BLUE
Return to normal TV viewing.
EXIT
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When selected photo files are displayed
Page 1/1
Photo List
Mark Mode
USB1 External
Page 1/1
Drive1
001
010
002
003
012
004
013
005
014
006
015
007
008
009
011
MARK
Move
Mark
P
Page Change
Mark
Exit
Mark All
Unmark All
Exit Mark Mode
View Marked
1
2
3
• When one or more photos are marked, you
can view each marked photo or a slide show
of the marked photos. If no photos are
marked, you can view every individual photo
in the folder or a slide show of all photos in
the folder.
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired photos.
Convert to Mark Mode.
BLUE
RED
or
4
5
Mark desired photo file.
Marked photo file is displayed.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the remote control
RED
Display the selected photo file.
GREEN
Mark all photo files on the screen.
YELLOW
BLUE
EXIT
Deselect all marked photo files.
Exit the Mark Mode.
Return to normal TV viewing.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to view photo
Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen.
Page 1/1
Photo List
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
001
010
002
003
012
004
013
005
014
006
015
007
008
009
011
MARK
Mark
Move
View
P
Page Change
Exit
To Music List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
◄
►
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.
Press the EXIT button to move to the previous
menu screen.
◄
►
2/13
►
■
Slideshow
BGM
Q.MENU
Hide
Exit
Option
1
2
Select the target folder or drive.
• Use the P
photo page.
button to navigation in the
Select the desired photos.
3
The selected photo is displayed in full
size.
• Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.
• Press the BACK button to make Help OSD disappear.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
01_a.jpg
Select the
Slideshow,
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
4
BGM, ꘤ (Rotate),
/
,
,
◄
►
Option, Hide or
Exit.
◄
►
2/13
• Use button to select the previous
or next photo.
►
■
Slideshow
BGM
Q.MENU
Hide
Exit
Option
• Use button to select and control
the menu on the full-sized screen.
► Slideshow : When no picture is selected, all photos in the cur-
rent folder are displayed during slide show. If some photos are
selected, those photos are displayed in a slide show.
■ Set the time interval of the slide show in Option.
► BGM (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos
in full size.
■ Set the BGM device and album in Options before using
this function.
■ You can adjust Option by Q.MENU or MENU button on
the remote control.
► ꘤ (Rotate)
: Rotate photos.
■ Rotates the photo 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° clockwise.
■ It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger
than supported height.
►
►
/
: You can view the photo in Full or Original mode.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to
:
change the brightness of your screen. (Refer to p. 138)
► Option : Set values for Slide Speed and BGM.
■ Use button and OK button to set values. Press
OK to save the settings.
■ You cannot change BGM while BGM is playing.
■ You can only select the MP3 folder saved on the device
that currently displays the photo.
► Hide : Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press
OK button to display.
Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Photo List function
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
Choose options.
Set Photo View.
Set Video.
◄
►
Set Audio.
Close
◄
►
2/13
►
■
Slideshow
BGM
Q.MENU
Hide
Exit
Option
1
2
or
Show the Option menu.
Select Set Photo View., Set Video., Set Audio. or Set 3D video.(Only 42/47LX6
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9 ).
*** ***
***,
NOTE
►Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
►Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and
Music List excluding Movie List.
(Only 42/47LX6
47/55LX9
)
***
►You cannot select the Option in 3D imaging mode.
***,
►If you want to listen to BGM (background music) while viewing *mpo image files, play a *jpg file
and set the BGM folder in "Option - Set Photo View." Then, you can select and listen to BGM
(Only 42/47LX6
47/55LX9
)
***
when viewing *mpo files.
***,
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Photo View,
Set Photo View.
Slide Speed
◄
►
Fast
BGM
Drive1
On
● Repeat
● Random
◄
◄
►
►
Off
Previous
1
2
Select Slide Speed or BGM.
Make appropriate adjustments.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When you select the Set Video,
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
PLASMA TV Only
Set Video.
Set Video.
Picture Mode
Picture Mode
◄
◄
►
►
◄
◄
◄
►
►
Photo
Standard
● Contrast
100
50
● Backlight
● Contrast
● Brightness
● Colour
70
● Brightness
◄
100
50
● Sharpness
● Colour
● Tint
50
60
0
◄
◄
►
►
◄
◄
►
►
60
● Dynamic Contrast
● Edge Enhancer
● Noise Reduction
◄
◄
R
G
C
►
►
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
Medium
High
● Colour Temp.
0
W
Medium
● Dynamic Contrast
◄
►
Off
TruMotion
◄
►
Low
Picture Reset
Previous
Picture Reset
Previous
1
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 139 to 148)
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Audio,
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◄
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
►
Standard
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Balance
Off
Off
L
R
0
Previous
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or Balance.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 154 to 158)
■ When you select the Set 3D video, (Only 42/47LX6
47/55LX9 , 50/60PX9
***
)
***
***,
Put on 3D glasses.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best
3D view.
(To select more comfortable view for
you, change to left/right image of
Power on your 3D glasses and put them on.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
Power on your 3D glasses and put them on.
Sit 2 meters from TV to enjoy the best 3D
view.
glasses with
button.)
or
or
Cancel
OK
Cancel
OK
OK
3D effect setting : 10
Left/Right image change
Setting Left/Right
3D
End 3D video
For more information, see the 3D Imaging section in the Owner's Manual.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUSIC LIST
You can play music files on USB or PC storage device.
Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be
supported by this model.
Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV
operation.
MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file
Bit rate 32 to 320
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
Screen Components
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.
2
1
Select Music List.
Select MY MEDIA.
3
2
1
Preview: If any album jacket
for the file(Album Art Image)
exists, this jacket is displayed.
Page 1/1
Music List
Page 1/1
USB1 External
Drive1
6
5
001. - B01.mp3
00:00
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
2
3
4
Moves to upper level folder
Current page/Total pages
1
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
5 Contents under the folder
2
focused on
MARK
Move
Play
P
Page Change
Mark
6
Current page/ total pages of
Exit
To Movie List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
contents under the folder
2
focused on
4
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Music Selection
Page 1/1
Music List
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
001. - B01.mp3
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
MARK
Mark
Move
Play
P
Page Change
Exit
To Movie List
Change Numbers
Mark Mode
Change Device
■ When playing music files
• Use the P
button to navigate up/down in
the music page.
1
Select the target folder or drive.
2
3
Select the desired music title.
Music files are played.
Using the remote control
RED
Change device.
GREEN
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Movie List->Photo List.
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.
Convert to Mark Mode.
YELLOW
BLUE
Return to normal TV viewing.
EXIT
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When selected music files are played
Page 1/1
Music List
Mark Mode
USB1 External
Page 1/1
Drive1
001. - B01.mp3
002. -B02.mp3
00:00
003. B03.mp3
00:00
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
MARK
Mark
Move
Mark
P
Page Change
Exit
Mark All
Unmark All
Exit Mark Mode
Play Marked
1
2
3
• When one or more music files are marked,
the marked music title will be played in
sequence. For example, if you want to listen
to only one music repeatedly, just mark the
music only and play it. If no music is marked,
all the music in the folder will be played in
sequence.
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired music title.
Convert to Mark Mode.
Mark desired music file.
BLUE
RED
• If you want to activate Random playback, you
must set Option->Set audio play.->Random
to On.
or
4
5
Marked music file is played.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the remote control
RED
Display the selected music file.
GREEN
Mark all music files on the screen.
YELLOW
BLUE
EXIT
Deselect all marked music files.
Exit the Mark Mode.
Return to normal TV viewing.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Music List function, play
Page 1/1
Music List
3 file(s) Marked
Page 1/1
Drive1
USB1 External
Choose options.
Set Audio Play.
►
Set Audio.
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
00:00
006. - B06.mp3
00:00
007. - B07.mp3
00:00
008. - B08.mp3
00:00
Close
◄►
005. - B05.mp3
►
02:30 / 03:25
Play with Photo
Q.MENU
Option
Hide
Exit
■
►
◄◄ ►►
II
1
2
or
Show the Option menu.
Select Set Audio Play. or Set Audio.
NOTE
► Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.
► Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List
excluding Movie List.
► You can listen to the music only within the device currently played.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
Using the remote control
■
Stop the playing music file.
( )
Press the PLAY ► button to return to normal playback.
►
( )
When you press the Pause II button while playing the file, the playback will be
paused.
II
( )
When you press the Pause II button again while the playback is paused, it will
resume the playback.
When playing,
(
)
◄◄ / ►►
When you press the REW ◄◄ button, the previous music file will be played.
When you press the FF ►► button, the next music file will be played.
(
)
GREEN
Start playing the selected music files and then move to the Photo List.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 138)
Only Off/Screen Off operates from the Movie List, Photo List, Music List (LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only).
Q.MENU
MENU
or
Show the Option menu.
■ When you press the Back button while the music is playing, the music player
BACK
currently playing will be hidden and only the music list will be displayed.
■ When you press the Exit button while the Music player is displayed, only the
music will be stopped and the player will not return to normal TV viewing.
EXIT
■ When you press the Exit button while the music is stopped or while the music
player is hidden, the player will return to normal TV viewing.
<
>
■ When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can
< >
be played.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ When you select the Set Audio Play,
Set Audio Play.
Repeat
◄
◄
►
►
On
Off
Random
Previous
1
2
Select Repeat or Random.
Make appropriate adjustments.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
■ When you select the Set Audio,
Set Audio.
Sound Mode
◄
◄
◄
◄
►
►
►
►
Standard
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Balance
Off
Off
L
R
0
Previous
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or Balance.
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 154 to 158)
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the
play information box (as shown in the below) will float as a
screen saver.
■ The ‘Screen Saver’?
Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an
fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of
time.
002. B02.mp3
► 00:31 / 04:04
NOTE
► A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
► A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate
information in playtime.
► If you press OK,
► The PLAY(►), Pause(II),
► You can use the ►► button to select the next music and the ◄◄ button to select the previous music.
■
buttons, screen saver is stopped.
■
, ►►, ◄◄ buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO USE A USB OR PC DEVICE
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE
Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be
rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.
With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed.
(Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.)
You must register your device to
MY MEDIA
DivX Reg. Code
Deactivation
play DivX protected videos.
Registration code : **********
Register at http://vod.divx.com
Previous
Movie List
Photo List
Music List
Close
Press OK( ) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
Exit
1
2
3
Select MY MEDIA.
BLUE
Select DivX Reg. Code.
Display DivX Reg. Code.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
®
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This
is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com
for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
®
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be reg-
istered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate
the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu.
Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and
learn more about DivX VOD.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content”
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,668;7,515,710;7,519,274”
NOTE
►Movie files are supported as follows
Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels
Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720)
►Video Codec : MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264/AVC, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6,
Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1, Xvid 1.10-beta2, JPEG, VC1,
Sorenson H.263/H.264
►The DRM/*.tp /*.trp file in DLNA server is not played when Movie List is in operation.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEACTIVATION
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the
available devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD
allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any
of those devices, the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this
added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage
their DivX VOD devices.
Deregistration code :
MY MEDIA
DivX Reg. Code
Deactivation
********
Deregister at http://vod.divx.com
Continue with registration?
Previous
Movie List
Photo List
Music List
Yes
No
Press OK( ) to view the list of photos in the USB or PC.
Option
Exit
1
2
3
4
Select MY MEDIA.
BLUE
Select Deactivation.
Select Yes.
Display Deactivation.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAME
GAME
Allows you to enjoy the games installed on the TV.
GAME
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
LOCK
JUMP
HOLE IN ONE
WHACK A MOLE SUDOKU COOKING BURGER
MY MEDIA
GAME
OPTION
NETWORK
SAVING CRYSTAL INVADER URGENT SURVIVAL
BLUETOOTH
Exit
Press OK(
) to set programme settings.
Customer Support
Exit
Simple Manual
1
2
3
Select GAME.
Select the desired game.
Enter the selected game mode.
• Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
(IN DIGITAL MODE)
This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible
viewing options.
The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In
addition, detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and
amount of these programme details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).
This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies.
You must set the Clock in the Time menu, before using EPG function.
The EPG displays the programme details for 8 days.
Pr. Change ► Next
Watch
DTV 1 TV ONE
Good Morning
16:9
HE-AAC
720p
...
21:00
00:00
Show/Game Show
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
with regular and special guests.
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,
Up
Down
▼
Shows current programme information
Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme.
Displayed with a Radio Programme.
Displayed with a MHEG Programme.
Displayed with a HE-AAC Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
Displayed with a Teletext Programme.
Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.
Displayed with a Scramble Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Plus Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme
Broadcasted programme with the icon may not be displayed in Monitor Out depending on the informa-
tion of the programme.
Displayed with a MHP Programme.
Shows next programme information.
Shows other programme information.
Tyra
2 TV2
28 Sep. 2008 21:00~00:00
Record
Remind
Pr. Change ◄ Now
Schedule
DTV 2 TV2
Tyra
Close
21:00
00:00
Show/Game Show
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.
A pop-up window for record/remind settings
appear.
129
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
Switch on/off EPG
1
Switch on or off EPG.
Select a programme
1
or
Select desired programme.
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode
You can view a programme being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.
Programme Guide
▲
RED
YELLOW
BLUE
Change EPG mode.
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
That ’70s show
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
NOW
NEXT
ALL
YLE TV1
Enter Manual Timer mode.
Enter Schedule List mode.
1
2
4
5
6
8
That ’70s show
Keno
YLE TV2
TV..
Your World Today
Legenen om Den....
Naturtimmen
Lyssna
World Business
Fantomen
Kritiskt
YLE FST
CNN
ABC
YLE24
Glamour
Tänään otsikoissa
▼
When ‘NOW’ is selected, it is moved to
selected programme and EPG disap-
pears
FAV Favourite
Mode
INFO
i
Information
Watch/Schedule
Manual Timer
TV/RAD RADIO
Schedule List
When ‘NEXT’ is selected, a reservation
pop-up window appears.
or
or
Switch off EPG.
Select NOW or NEXT Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
Page Up/Down.
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
Detail information on or off.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode
Programme Guide
▲
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
That ’70s show
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
◄
◄
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
Tue. 25 Nov.
15:00
Change EPG mode.
ALL
14:00
▼
1
2
4
5
6
8
YLE TV1
YLE TV2
TV..
Antigues Roadshow
Mint Extra TV2: Farmen
The Drum
Kungskonsumente
The Drum
Enter Date setting mode.
Enter Manual Timer mode.
Enter Schedule List mode.
YLE FST
CNN
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
YLE24
...
...
... ...
Tänään otsikoissa
FAV Favourite
Mode
INFO
Date
i
Information
Watch/Schedule
Manual Timer
TV/RAD RADIO
Schedule List
Page Up/Down.
When ‘Currently broadcasting pro-
gramme’ is selected, it is moved to
selected programme and EPG disap-
pears
or
or
Switch off EPG.
When ‘Future broadcasting programme’
is selected, a reservation pop-up window
appears.
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
Detail information on or off.
Select Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
Button Function in Date Change Mode
Programme Guide
▲
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
That ’70s show
GREEN
or
or
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
Switch off Date setting mode.
◄
◄
Tue. 25 Nov.
15:00
ALL
14:00
▼
1
2
4
5
6
8
YLE TV1
YLE TV2
TV..
Kungskonsumente
The Drum
Antigues Roadshow
Mint Extra TV2: Farmen
The Drum
Change to the selected date.
Select a date.
YLE FST
CNN
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
YLE24
...
...
... ...
Tänään otsikoissa
▼
Date Change
Date Exit
or
Switch off EPG.
Button Function in Extended Description Box
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
The detail information on or off.
Fia World Touring Car Chanpionship
Tue. 25 Nov. 2008 10:05
12:40
Fia Champion
Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's
Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted
house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry
of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The
Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp;
Text Up/Down.
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
Remind
Record
Close
or
Switch off EPG.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode
Sets a start or end time, programme for recording, and sets a start time, programme for the reminder
with the end time grayed out.
This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been
connected to the TV-OUT(AV1) terminal, using a SCART cable.
Recording function is only supported in the Digital mode and not in the Analogue mode.
Manual Timer
Switch off Manual Timer mode.
Select the date to schedule.
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009 13:46
Wed. 12 Aug2009
Sun. Mon. Tue.
Wed.
Thu.
Fri.
Sat.
09
16
Select a schedule type
Select Remind or Record function setting.
Type
StartTime
End Time Programme
▲
st
Close
Record
▼
15
:
09
17
:
30
DTV 801 ANTV D...
23
30
Select Type, Start Time, End time or
Programme.
Prev.
Exit
OK
Move
Programme Guide
OK
Schedule List
YELLOW
Change to Guide mode.
BLUE
Change to Schedule List mode.
Save Timer Record/Remind.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)
Button Function in Schedule List Mode
If you’ve created a schedule list, a scheduled programme is displayed at the scheduled time even
when you are watching a different programme at the time.
Currently recording item cannot be edited or deleted.
Schedule List
Page1/1
Start Date
Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09
Start Time
16:00
Title
Friend2
16:00
YELLOW
Change to Manual Timer mode.
6 May
6 May
Friend1
Friend2
18:00
Modify
Delete
or
BLUE
Change to Guide mode.
Delete All
Remind
DTV 19 Dave
(Fri.)06/05/2007
16:00
Close
Switch off Schedule List.
Exit
P
Move
Modify/Delete
Programme Guide
Page Change
ꔀ
Manual Timer
Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/
Delete All).
Select programme.
Page Up/Down.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan,
Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom.
If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed
image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible.
You can adjust the enlarge proportion using
This function works in the following signal.
button.
1
• You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the
PICTURE menu.
Select Aspect Ratio.
• For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After com-
pleting Zoom Setting, the display goes
back to Q.Menu.
2
Select the desired picture format.
• 16:9
• Original
The following selection will allow you to adjust the pic-
ture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the entire
screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted DVDs).
When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will auto-
matically change to the picture format broadcast.
Original
• Just Scan
• Full Wide
Following Selection will lead to you view the
picture of best quality without loss of original
picture in high resolution image.
When TV receives the wide screen signal,it will lead
you to adjust the picture horizontally or vertically, in
a linear proportion,to fill the entire screen fully.
Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You
can see the noise at the edge.
4:3 and 14:9 video is supported in full screen with-
out any video distortion through DTV input.
Just Scan
Full Wide
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
• 4:3
• Zoom
The following selection will allow you to view
The following selection will allow you to view a picture
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.
the picture without any alteration, while filling
the entire screen. However, the top and bottom
of the picture will be cropped.
• 14:9
You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general TV
programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen is
viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is moved to the
up and down.
• Cinema Zoom
Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
Note:When enlarging or reducing the picture,
the image may become distorted.
◄ or ► button: Adjust enlarge proportion of
Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1 to 16.
▼ or ▲ button: Move the screen.
NOTE
► You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in Component mode.
► You can only select 4:3, Original, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in HDMI mode.
► You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide) in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only.
► In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, Just Scan is available.
► In Analogue/DTV/AV/Scart mode, Full Wide is available.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE WIZARD
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image.
Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can
calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage.
When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an
example.
In RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not
applied.
Picture Wizard
PICTURE
Move
OK
With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the
original image.
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
●
Picture Wizard
Energy Saving : Off
Picture Mode : Standard
●
●
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
70
100
50
Previous
Next
• If you stop the setting before
the final stage, the changes
will not be applied
1
2
Select PICTURE.
• The adjustment value is
saved to Expert1.
Select Picture Wizard.
• Once the Picture Wizard sets
the image quality, the Energy
Saving is changed into Off.
Adjust Standard(Black Level, White Level,
Tint, Colour, Horizontal Sharpness, Vertical
Sharpness, Backlight (LCD TV/LED LCD TV
only)) or Preferred(Black Level, White Level,
Tint, Colour, Sharpness, Dynamic Contrast,
Colour Temperature, Backlight (LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only)).
•
If the picture quality setting
of Expert1 is changed, use
the Picture Reset before
entering the Picture Wizard
to reset the picture quality
setting.
3
4
5
•
•
Standard : mode to set stan-
dard picture quality.
Select input source to apply the settings.
Preferred : mode to set user
preferred picture quality rath-
er than standard picture.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
ENERGY SAVING
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.
The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.
You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by setting
the Picture Mode.
When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG/MHP mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after
MHEG/MHP is finished.
Selecting ‘Screen Off’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
Plasma TV only
PICTURE
Move
OK
PICTURE
Move
OK
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
Picture Wizard
Picture Wizard
Auto
Off
Intelligent Sensor
●
Energy Saving : Off
●
Energy Saving : Intelligent Sens
Off
●
Picture Mode : Standard
●
Picture Mode
: Vivid
Minimum
Medium
Minimum
Medium
Maximum
Screen Off
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
7
10
5
• Contrast
• Brightness
10
5
Maximum
Screen Off
1
2
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select PICTURE.
Select
Energy Saving.
Select
Energy Saving.
Select Auto(Except for
Select Intelligent Sensor, Off,
Minimum , Medium,
Maximum or Screen Off.
3
32/37/42LD4 ), Off,
***
Minimum , Medium,
Maximum or Screen Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• When you select Screen Off, the screen will be turned off in 3 seconds and Screen Off will start.
• If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto(Except for 32/37/42LD4 ), Maximum”, Backlight feature will
***
not work. (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
• If you adjust “Energy Saving-Intelligent Sensor”, Sharpness, Colour, Colour Temperature feature
will not work. (Plasma TV only)
• You can also adjust this feature by selecting Energy Saving button on the remote control.
• When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the
surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV. (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)(Except for
32/37/42LD4
)
***
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS
Picture Mode-Preset
Vivid
Strengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture.
Standard
The most general screen display status.
Optimizes power consumption. (Plasma TV Only)
Cinema Optimizes video for watching movies.
Cinema or
Bright Room
This is the specification to optimize TV viewing in Bright Room. (42/47/55LE8
Plasma TV Only)
,
***
Sport
Game
Optimizes video for watching sports events.
Optimizes video for playing games.
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
Plasma TV only
PICTURE
Move
OK
PICTURE
Move
OK
●
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
●
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
Picture Wizard
Picture Wizard
Vivid
Energy Saving : Intelligent Se
Energy Saving : Off
Standard
●
Picture Mode
:
●
Picture Mode
: Standard
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Contrast
70
100
50
Cinema
• Brightness
Bright Room
Sport
Game
ꕋ Expert1
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
ꕋ Expert2
t
a
n
d
rd
a
t
a
n
d
rd
a
Cinema
Cinema
Bright Room
Sport
Sport
Game
Game
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
(only 42/47/55LE8
)
***
(Except for 42/47/55LE8
)
***
1
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select PICTURE.
2
Select Picture Mode.
Select Picture Mode.
Select Intelligent Sensor
Select Vivid, Standard,
Cinema,
Room, Sport or Game.
,
(
Except for 32/37/42LD4
)
***
, Vivid,
Standard, Cinema(Except for
42/47/55LE8 ),
Bright
3
***
Cinema(Only 42/47/55LE8 ),
***
Bright Room(Only
42/47/55LE8 ), Sport or
***
Game.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
• Picture Mode adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the
Picture Mode menu based on the programme category.
• When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted
according to the surrounding conditions.
• You can also adjust Picture Mode in the Q. Menu.
• Intelligent Sensor : Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions.
(Auto Power Saving) : Maximize reducting the power consumption without hurting the pic-
ture quality. (Plasma TV Only)
• If you adjust “Picture Mode-
Minimum, Medium, Maximum” feature will not work. (Plasma TV Only)
• If you adjust “Picture Mode- Cinema, Bright Room”, “Energy Saving-Auto, Minimum,
Medium, Maximum” feature will not work. (42/47/55LE8 Only)
(
Except for 32/37/42LD4
)
***
(
Except for 32/37/42LD4 )
***
•
Cinema,
Bright Room”, “Energy Saving-Intelligent Sensor,
***
”, “Energy Saving-Off, Minimum, Medium, Maximum” feature will
• If you adjust “Picture Mode-
not work. (Plasma TV only)
•
•
Cinema(42/47/55LE8 , Plasma TV Only) :This is cinema quality mode to provide you the
***
experience of watching a movie at home.The user will be able enjoy the best level of satisfactory
screen quality in any movie without any separate adjustments.Cinema expresses the optimal
screen quality when it is darkest.
When selecting
Cinema,
Bright Room Aspect ratio changes to Just scan.
Cinema(Thomlinson Holman ’s Experiment)is the audio and video certification standard of
THX established by George Lucas,who directed the movie Star Wars,and Thomlinson.
This is the product to be certified in THX display area and guarantees screen quality that exceeds
the display standard specification in both hardware and software.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT
Picture Mode-User option
Backlight (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel.
Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended.
Contrast
Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright
part of the picture is saturated.
Brightness
Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.
Sharpness
Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.
The lower the level, the softer the image.
Colour
Adjusts intensity of all colours.
Tint
Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.
Colour Temp.
Adjust to left direction to make a picture reddish or adjust to right direction to make a picture bluish.
It is not available to use this function in “Intelligent Sensor”.
(
Except for 32/37/42LD4 )
***
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only
Plasma TV only
PICTURE
Move
OK
PICTURE
Move
OK
●
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
●
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
Picture Wizard
Picture Wizard
Vivid
Energy Saving : Intelligent Se
Energy Saving : Off
Standard
●
Picture Mode
:
●
Picture Mode
: Standard
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Contrast
70
100
50
Cinema
• Brightness
Bright Room
Sport
Game
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
t
a
n
d
rd
a
t
a
n
d
rd
a
Cinema
Cinema
Bright Room
Sport
Sport
Game
Game
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
ꕋ Expert1
ꕋ Expert2
(only 42/47/55LE8
)
***
(Except for 42/47/55LE8
)
***
1
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select PICTURE.
2
3
Select Picture Mode.
Select Picture Mode.
Select Vivid, Standard,
Cinema(Except for
Select Vivid, Standard, Sport
or Game.
42/47/55LE8 ), Sport or Game.
***
Select Backlight, Contrast,
Brightness, Sharpness,
Colour, Tint or Colour Temp..
Select Contrast, Brightness,
Sharpness, Colour, Tint or
Colour Temp..
4
5
4
5
Make appropriate adjustments.
Make appropriate adjustments.
141
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
• Benefits of using Backlight
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
- The electricity consumption is reduced by up to 60 %.
- The black brightness is reduced. (As the black has greater depth, you can enjoy a better quality
definition.)
- You can adjust brightness with maintaining original signal resolution.
NOTE
►You cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode.
H Sharpness,
►When the Expert 1/2 is selected, you can select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness,
V Sharpness
, Colour or Tint.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special
video screen.
You can set the video value differently for each input.
To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the
“Picture Reset” function for each Picture Mode.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Dynamic Contrast
◄
►
PICTURE
Move
OK
Medium
Medium
Off
PICTURE
Dynamic Colour
• Colour
60
0
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Colour
◄
►
High
High
Clear White
• Colour
• Tint
R
G
C
• Tint
Skin Colour
0
Noise Reduction
Medium
Medium
Auto
W
• Colour Temp.
0
Noise Reduction
• Colour
Medium
Medium
Medium
Auto
Gamma
• Advanced Control
• Advanc
Digital Noise Reduction
Black Level
Film Mode
Colour Gamut
• Picture Reset
: Off
• Picture
Gamma
• TruMotion
• Screen
Off
• TruMotion
• Screen
: Off
Black Level
Eye Care
Wide
Low
▼
▼
Close
Close
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only Plasma TV only
1
2
Select PICTURE.
Select Advanced Control.
Select your desired Source.:
Dynamic Contrast, Dynamic Colour, Clear White(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only),
Skin Colour (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), Noise Reduction, Digital Noise
Reduction (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), Gamma, Black Level, Eye Care (LCD TV/
LED LCD TV only), Real Cinema (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), Film Mode(Plasma
TV only), Colour Gamut, Edge Enhancer (Plasma TV only) or xvYCC. (Refer to p.
145 to 146)
3
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL
By segmenting categories, Expert1 and Expert2 provide more categories which users can set as they
see fit, offering the optimal picture quality for users.
This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PICTURE
Move
OK
PICTURE
Dynamic Contrast
Dynamic Contrast
◄
►
◄
►
Medium
Off
Noise Reduction
Noise Reduction
Gamma
●
●
●
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
Medium
Medium
Auto
Off
Medium
Auto
• V S
Digital Noise Reduction
Picture Wizard
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
• Co
Energy Saving : Off
Picture Mode
Black Level
Black Level
Film Mode
Colour Gamut
Edge Enhancer
• Tin
:
Expert
●
Standard
Real Cinema
On
Off
• Exp
• Backlight
• Contrast
• Brightness
Cinema
Colour Gamut
EBU
Standard
Off
• Pic
Sport
Edge Enhancer
xvYCC
High
• TruMotion
• Screen
: Off
Game
xvYCC
Auto
Off
Auto
Off
Expert1
Expert Pattern
Expert Pattern
Expert2
▼
▼
Close
Close
LCD TV/LED LCD TV only Plasma TV only
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select PICTURE.
Select Picture Mode.
Select
Expert1 or
Expert2.
Select Expert Control.
Select your desired Source.
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*This feature is not available for all models.
Dynamic Contrast
■ Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of
(Off/Low/Medium(LCD
TV/LED LCD TV only)/
High)
the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark
parts darker.
Dynamic Colour
■ Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This fea-
ture enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and
white look more vivid.
(Off/Low/
Medium(Plasma TV only)
/High )
Skin Colour
(-5 to 5)
■ Adjusts skin colour of the picture so that user can set his favourite skin
colour.
Noise Reduction
(Off/Low/Medium/High/
Auto(In Analogue Mode
Only))
■ Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Digital Noise Reduction
(Low/Medium/High/Off)
■ Reduces noise regarding MPEG compressed video.
■ You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.
Gamma
•
Low/1.9 : Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter.
(Advanced Control:
Low/Medium/High
Expert Control:
1.9/2.2/2.4)
• Medium/2.2 : Expresses original picture levels.
• High/2.4: Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker.
■ When Antenna is used as input signal, it is set to Medium and deactivated.
(Plasma TV only)
•
•
•
Low : The picture of the screen gets darker.
High : The picture of the screen gets brighter.
Auto : Sets black level of the screen to High or Low automatically according to
the input signal level.
Black Level
(Low/High/Auto)
■ This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode:
AV(NTSC-M), HDMI or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'.
Clear White
(Off/Low/High)
■ Makes the white area of the screen brighter and clearer.
*This feature is not available for all models.
■ Adjusts the brightness of the screen automatically to the best level for
Eye Care
(Low/High/Off)
eyes when the screen is too bright.
■ This feature is disable in “Picture Mode-Vivid, Cinema, Expert1,
Expert2, Intelligent Sensor
(
Except for 32/37/42LD4 )”.
***
Real Cinema(LCD TV/
LED LCD TV only)/
■ You can watch a cinema-like video by eliminating judder effect.
■ Uses this function when you watch film-originated movie contents.
■ This function can work when TruMotion is off.
Film Mode
(Plasma TV only)
(On/Off)
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
Colour Gamut
(
LCD TV/LED LCD TV :
Advanced Control
& Plasma TV :
• Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char-
acteristics.
Advanced Control/
Expert Control)
• Wide: Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.
(Wide/Standard)
• Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char-
acteristics.
Colour Gamut
LCD TV/LED LCD TV
Expert Control)
(EBU/SMPTE/BT709/
Wide/Standard)
(
• Wide : Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.
• EBU : Mode to display EBU colour area.
:
• SMPTE : Mode to display SMPTE colour area.
• BT709 : Mode to display BT709 colour area.
Edge Enhancer
■ Makes the edge of the picture clearer and distinctive.
■ This function can use in “Picture Mode-Expert.” (LCD TV/LED LCD TV
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV
:Off/Low/High
Plasma TV:On/Off)
only)
*This feature is not available for all models.
xvYCC
■ This is the function to express richer colour.
(Auto/off/on)
■ This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC sig-
nal is inputted through HDMI
Expert Pattern
■ This is the pattern necessary for checking the picture of Digital TV.
(Off/Pattern1/Pattern2) ■ This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV.
Colour Filter
■ This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.
(Off/Red/Green/Blue)
This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want.
a. • Method : 2 Points
• Pattern: Inner, Outer
• Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:
The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
b. • Method : 10 point IRE(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 20 Point IRE(Plasma TV)
• Pattern: Inner / Outer
Colour Temperature
(Medium/Warm/Cool)
• IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video sig-
nal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 to 100(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 5, 10, 15 to
100(Plasma TV). You can adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting.
• Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma.
You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance
value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE. (LCD
TV/LED LCD TV)
• Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
■ As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test pat-
terns, this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively
adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).
Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjust-
ments for the general video.
Colour Management
System
■ Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.
• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Colour : The adjustment
range is -30 to +30.
•
Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment
range is -30 to +30.
■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.
PICTURE
PICTURE
Move
OK
Move
OK
• Colour
60
0
• Colour
• Tin
60
R
G
C
• Tint
All picture settings will be reset.
?
W
• Colour Temp.
0
• Co
Continue?
• Advanced Control
• Ad
• Picture Reset
• Pic
Yes
No
• TruMotion
• Screen
: Off
• TruMotion
• Screen
: Off
1
2
3
4
Select PICTURE.
Select Picture Reset.
Select Yes.
Initialize the adjusted value.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
TRUMOTION
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV ONLY)
It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image
or Film Source.
High : Provide smoother picture movement.
Low : Provide smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.
Off : Turn off TruMotion Operation.
User : User can adjust Judder and Blur level in TruMotion Operation, separately.
- Judder : Adjust noise of the screen.
- Blur : Adjust after-image of the screen.
This feature is disable in RGB-PC,HDMI-PC mode.
If you enable "TruMotion", noise may appear on the screen.
If this occurs, set "TruMotion" to "Off".
If you select “Picture Mode-Game ”, set “TruMotion" to "Off".
PICTURE
Move
OK
• Colour
60
0
TruMotion
● Judder
● Blur
◄
►
Low
R
G
C
• Tint
3
3
W
• Colour Temp.
0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
: Off
OK
• TruMotion
• Screen
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select TruMotion.
Select Low, High, User or Off.
4
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LED LOCAL DIMMING
(Only 32/37/42LE4 , 42/47/55LE5 , 42/47/55LE75 , 42/47/55LE78 ,
*** *** ** **
42/47/55LE79 , 42/47/55LE8 , 42/47LX6 , 47/55LX9 )
** *** *** ***
After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve
the contrast ratio.
PICTURE
PICTURE
Move
OK
Move
OK
0
0
R
G
C
R
G
C
• Tint
• Tint
W
W
• Colour Temp.
0
• Colour Temp.
0
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
: Off
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• TruMotion
• Screen
• TruMotion
• Screen
: Off
Off
• LED Local Dimming : On
• LED Local Dimming : On
On
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.
Select LED Local Dimming.
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
POWER INDICATOR
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV ONLY)
Adjust the power/standby indicator light on the front of the TV.
Standby Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off in standby mode.
Power Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off when the power turns on.
If you select 3D mode, Power indicator is turned off automatically.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: UK
Country
: UK
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Standby Light
Power Light
◄
►
On
On
: 1
: 1
Mode Setting
: Home Use
Mode Setting
: Hom
Close
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.
Select Power Indicator.
Select Standby Light or Power Light.
Select your desired Source.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD
(PLASMA TV ONLY)
A frozen or still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods will result in a ghost image
remaining even when you change the image. Avoid allowing a fixed image to remain on the screen for
prolonged periods.
White Wash
White wash removes permanent images from the screen.
Note: An excessive permanent image may be impossible to clear entirely with White Wash.
Orbiter
Orbiter may help prevent ghost images. However, it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain
on the screen. To avoid a permanent image on the screen, the screen will move every 2 minutes.
Colour Wash
The color block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed. It is
difficult to sense the afterimage occurred while the temporary afterimage is removed and the colour
pattern is operating.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: UK
Country
: UK
Disability Assistance
Disability Assistance
Normal
ISM Method
: Normal
ISM Method
: Normal
Orbiter
Factory Reset
Set ID
Factory Reset
Set ID
Colour Wash
White Wash
: 1
: 1
Mode Setting
: Home Use
Mode Setting
: Home Use
• If you do not need this function, set Normal.
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.
Select ISM Method.
Select Normal, Orbiter, Colour
Wash or White Wash.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE CONTROL
MODE SETTING
We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use ” mode for the best picture in your home environment.
“Store Demo ” mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: UK
Country
: UK
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.
: 1
: 1
Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home. To use
●
Mode Setting
: Home Use
●
Mode Setting
th
is TV at store, select [Store Demo].
: Hom
Store Demo
Off
Home Use
Demo Mode
●
Close
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.
Select Mode Setting.
Select Store Demo or Home Use.
Save.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEMO MODE
It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use mode.
In Store Demo, Demo Mode is automatically set to On.
Once Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo, Demo Mode does not run and only the screen is
reset.
The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in Demo Mode.
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: UK
Country
: UK
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
Selecting the environment.
Choose the setting mode you want.
: 1
: 1
Select [Store Demo] to use this TV in store. To use
●
Mode Setting
: Home Use
●
Mode Setting
this TV at home, select [Home Use].
: Hom
Store Demo
On
Home Use
Demo Mode
●
Close
1
2
3
4
5
Select OPTION.
Select Mode Setting.
Select Store Demo.
Select On.
Move to the previous menu screen.
If you want to stop the demo, press any button.
(except for MUTE, + , - button)
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME LEVELER
Auto Volume automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed
every time the programme is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by mak-
ing automatic adjustments for each programme.
If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate home the-
ater system or amp to cope with different user environments.
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
Off
●
Auto Volume
: Off
●
Auto Volume
: Off
On
●
●
●
Clear Voice II
Balance
: Off
3
●
●
●
Clear Voice II
Balance
: Off
3
L
R
L
R
0
0
Sound Mode
: Standard
Sound Mode
: Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.
Select Auto Volume.
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.
Move
OK
AUDIO
Move
OK
AUDIO
●
Auto Volume
: Off
●
Auto Volume
: Off
●
Clear Voice II
◄
►
Off
●ClearVoiceII
:Off
3
●ClearVoiceII
:Off
3
●
Level
3
●
●
Balance
-
+
L
R
●
●
Balance
0
Sound Mode
: Standard
Sound Mode
: Standard
Close
• Infinite Sound :
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
1
2
3
• If you select “On” for Clear Voice II,
Infinite Sound feature will not work.
Select AUDIO.
• Select levels from ‘-6’ to ’+6’.
Select Clear Voice II.
Select On or Off.
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On
4
Select Level.
5
Make desired adjustment.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS-SOUND MODE
You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game and you can
also adjust the Treble, Bass.
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appro-
priate sound options based on the programme content.
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory.
Standard Offers standard-quality sound.
Music
Cinema
Sport
Optimizes sound for listening to music.
Optimizes sound for watching movies.
Optimizes sound for watching sports events.
Optimizes sound for playing games.
Game
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
●
●
●
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Balance
: Off
: Off
●
●
●
Auto Volume
: Off
: Off
3
Clear Voice II
Balance
3
L
R
Standard
0
Music
Cinema
Sport
●SoundMode
:Standard
●SoundMode
:Standard
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
Game
• You can also adjust Sound Mode in the Q.
Menu.
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.
Select Sound Mode.
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or
Game.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
●
●
●
Auto Volume
: Off
: Off
●
●
●
Auto Volume
: Off
: Off
Clear Voice II
Balance
3
Clear Voice II
Balance
3
L
R
Standard(User)
0
Music
Cinema
Sport
●SoundMode
:Standard(User)
• Infinite Sound : Off
●SoundMode
:Standard(Use
• Infinite Sound
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
Game
1
2
3
4
5
Select AUDIO.
Select Sound Mode.
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or
Game.
Select Treble or Bass.
Set the desired sound level.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
INFINITE SOUND
Select this option to sound realistic.
1
Infinite Sound : Infinite Sound is a patented
LG proprietary sound processing technology
that strives immersive 5.1 surround sound
impression with front two loudspeakers.
Select AUDIO.
2
Select Infinite Sound.
3
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels.
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
●
●
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
: Off
: Off
●
●
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
: Off
: Off
3
3
◄
L
R
►
●
L
R
Balance
0
●Balance
Sound Mode
0
●Balance
Sound Mode
●
: Standard
●
: Standard
Close
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.
Select Balance.
Make desired adjustment.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV SPEAKERS ON/ OFF SETUP
You can adjust the TV internal speaker status.
In AV, COMPONENT, RGB and HDMI1 with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational
even when there is no video signal.
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
• Reset
: PCM
:On
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
• Reset
: PCM
:On
50
50
●
Digital Audio Out
●
Digital Audio Out
Off
On
●TVSpeaker
●TVSpeaker
●
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
●
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.
Select TV Speaker.
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
NOTE
► When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automati-
cally switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output the
TV speaker.
► Some menus in AUDIO are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
DTV AUDIO SETTING (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type
you want.
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
• Reset
: PCM
: On
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
• Reset
: PCM
: On
50
50
Auto
HE-AAC
●
●
Digital Audio Out
TV Speaker
●
●
●
Digital Audio Out
TV Speaker
Dolby Digital+
Dolby Digital
MPEG
●
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
DTV Audio Setting :Auto
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.
Select DTV Audio Setting.
Select Auto, HE-AAC, Dolby Digital +, Dolby
Digital or MPEG.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
• Auto: Automatically outputs in the order HE-AAC > Dolby Digital+ > Dolby Digital > MPEG.
(Except for Italy)
Auto: Automatically outputs in the order HE-AAC > Dolby Digital+ > MPEG > Dolby Digital.
(Only Italy)
• HE-AAC, Dolby Digital +, Dolby Digital, MPEG: Allows users to select the audio type they want.
ex) If MPEG is selected, MPEG is always outputted.
If MPEG is not supported, another audio type is set in that order.
• Refer to p. 167 to 168 (Audio Language Selection)
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.
When Dolby Digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony
Philips Digital InterFace) output to Dolby Digital.
If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when Dolby Digital is not available, SPDIF output will
be PCM(Pulse-code modulation).
Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby
Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played.
Move
OK
AUDIO
Move
OK
AUDIO
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Treble
• Bass
50
50
• Reset
• Reset
Auto
PCM
: PCM
●
●
●
Digital Audio Out
TV Speaker
: PCM
●
●
●
Digital Audio Out
TV Speaker
: On
: On
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
1
2
3
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Select AUDIO.
Select Digital Audio Out.
• There is a possibility that when HDMI mode,
some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound.
At that time, set the output of the digital audio of
the DVD player to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital
Plus is not supported).
Select Auto or PCM.
Item
Audio Input
MPEG
Digital Audio output
PCM
Auto(Speaker On) Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
PCM
Dolby Digital Plus
HE-AAC
MPEG
PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
HE-AAC
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Auto(Speaker Off)
PCM
All
PCM
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUDIO RESET
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.
Move
OK
Move
OK
AUDIO
AUDIO
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Infinite Sound : Off
• Treble
• Bass
• Reset
: PCM
: On
50
50
• Tr
All audio settings will be resetted.
?
• B
• R
: P
: On
Continue?
●
●
●
Digital Audio Out
TV Speaker
●
●
●
Digital Audio Out
TV Speaker
Yes
No
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
DTV Audio Setting : Auto
1
2
3
4
Select AUDIO.
Select Reset.
Select Yes.
Initialize the adjusted value.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV
programme in addition to the basic audio.
When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those
programmes that have Audio Description included.
Volume
Beep
Changes the Audio Description volume
Beeps when a programme with Audio Description information is selected
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
Language(Language)
Country : UK
●
●
Language(Language)
Country : UK
Hard of Hearing(
)
Off
On
●
Disability Assistance
●
Disability Assistance
Audio Description
• Volume
◄
►
●
●
●
●
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
●
●
●
●
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Set ID
-
+
0
: 1
: 1
• Beep
Off
Mode Setting
: Home Use
Mode Setting
: Hom
Close
1
2
3
Select OPTION.
Select Disability Assistance.
Select Audio Description.
Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On
4
Select Volume or Beep.
5
Make desired adjustment.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
I/II
STEREO/DUAL RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)
When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme
number and station name.
1
Select Audio or Audio Language
.
2
Select the sound output.
Broadcast
Mono
On Screen Display
MONO
STEREO
Stereo
Dual
DUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II
■ Mono sound selection
If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the
clarity of sound is improved.
■ Language selection for dual language broadcast
If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I,
DUAL II or DUAL I+II.
DUAL I
DUAL II
Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
DUAL I+II Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NICAM RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)
If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous
Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.
Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.
1
When NICAM mono is received, you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO.
When NICAM stereo is received, you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO.
2
If the stereo signal is weak, switch to FM MONO.
When NICAM dual is received, you can select NICAM DUAL I, NICAM DUAL II or
3
NICAM DUAL I+II or FM MONO.
SPEAKER SOUND OUTPUT SELECTION
In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and
right loudspeakers.
Select the sound output.
L+R: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from
audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker.
L+L: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
R+R: Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY
SELECTION
The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time.
1
Select your desired language.
S
elect your country. (Except for 32/37/42LE49 , 32/37/42/47/55LE59 , 42/47LE7390,
**
2
**
32/37/42/47/55LE79 , 42/47/55LE89 , 32/37/42LD49 , 32/37/42/47/55LD69 , 32/42/47LD79
32/37/42LD89 , 42/47LX69 , 50/60PK59 , 50/60PK79 , 50/60PK99 , 50/60PX99
,
**
**
**
**
**
**
)
**
**
**
*
**
* If you want to change Language/ Country selection
1
1
2
3
4
5
Select OPTION.
Select OPTION.
Select Country.
Select your country.
Select Yes or No.
2
Select Language(Language).
3
Select Menu Language.
4
Select your desired language.
5
Save.
Save.
(Except for 32/37/42LE49 , 32/37/42/47/55LE59
**
,
42/47LE7390,
**
32/37/42/47/55LE79 , 42/47/55LE89
,
**
32/37/42LD49
,
**
**
32/37/42/47/55LD69 , 32/42/47LD79 , 32/37/42LD89
,
42/47LX69
,
**
**
**
**
50/60PK59 , 50/60PK79 , 50/60PK99 , 50/60PX99
)
*
**
**
**
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
NOTE
► If you do not finish the set-up Installation Guide by pressing BACK or if you time out on the OSD (On
Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the
TV is switched on.
► If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems
may occur during teletext operation.
► The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances.
► DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances.
► In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV function may not work depending on
digital broadcasting circumstances.
► The Country Setting "UK" should only be activated in UK.
► If the country setting is set to "--", European terrestrial digital standard broadcasting programmes are avail-
able, but some DTV functions may not work properly.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE SELECTION
The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.
If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a
selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed.
When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language and Text
Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category.
In Digital mode, use the Text language function when two or more Text languages are broadcast. If teletext
data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default Text language page will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.
Select OPTION.
Select Language(Language).
Select Disability Assistance.
Select Audio Language, Subtitle
Language or Text Language(Except
for UK).
Select Hard of Hearing(
).
Select On or Off.
Select your desired language.
Save.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
Audio Language OSD Information
Display
N.A
Status
< Audio Language Selection >
Not Available
MPEG Audio
► When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can
select the audio language.
Dolby Digital Audio
Audio for “Visual Impaired”
Audio for “Hearing Impaired”
Dolby Digital Plus Audio
1
Select Audio or Audio Language
.
HE-AAC Audio
2
Select an audio language.
< Subtitle Language Selection >
Subtitle Language OSD Information
► When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you
can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button
on the remote control.
Display
N.A
Status
Not Available
Teletext Subtitle
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”
► Press the
button to select a subtitle language.
- The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service pro-
vider.
- When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may output a part of
the Main audio.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIME SETTING
CLOCK SETUP
The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal in Auto mode. You can set the clock
manually in Manual mode.
You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function.
The TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a digital signal.
When if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour.
Time Zone menu can be changed in Auto mode.
TIME
TIME
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
Clock
●
Clock
◄
►
Auto
●
●
●
Off Time
: Off
●
●
●
Off Time
Date
Month
3
On Time
: Off
: Off
On Time
Mar.
2008
Sleep Timer
Sleep Timer
Year
Hour
16
09
Minute
Time Zone
London
GMT
Close
1
2
3
4
Time Zone
Select TIME.
Magadan, Kamchatka
Vladivostok
Yakutsk
Irkutsk
Krasnoyarsk
Omsk
Yekaterinburg
Moscow, Samara
Kaliningrad
Select Clock.
Select Auto or Manual.
Select either the year, month, date,
time or Time Zone option.
This Table means the Time Zone table of 9
area of Russia, and when the user selects the
Time Zone for his or her area, it automatically
sets the time for the corresponding area.
5
Set the year, month, date, time or Time
Zone option.
However, even though the user selected his
or her area, if the broadcasting station’s
local time offset is not offered, or if the
region information does not match, then the
user may select the Offset from the Time
Zone to set the correct time.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIME SETTING
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time.
Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to stand-
by mode unless a button has been pressed.
The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work.
TIME
TIME
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
Clock
●
●
●
●
Clock
1 Mar 2007 16:09
Off Time
On Time
Sleep Timer
: Off
Off Time
On Time
Sleep Timer
:
:
Repeat
◄
►
Off
00
: Off
: Off
Hour
:
Minute
00
Input
Antenna
TV1
Programme
Volume
30
Close
1
2
3
• To cancel On/Off Time function, select Off.
Select TIME.
• For On Time function only
1
Select Off Time or On Time.
Select Input.
2
Select the input source.
Select Repeat.
3
4
5
Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon. ~ Fri.,
Mon. ~ Sat., Sat. ~ Sun. or Sun..
Set the programme.
4
Adjust volume level at switch-on.
Set the hour.
6
Set the minutes.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep.
The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed.
1
Select Sleep Timer.
2
Select Off, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180 or 240 min.
• When you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled.
• You can also adjust Sleep Timer in the TIME menu.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Enter the password, press ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ on the remote control handset.
When France is selected for Country, password is not ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ but ‘1’,’2’,’3’,’4’.
When France is selected for Country, password cannot be set as ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’.
If a channel is locked, enter the password to unlock it temporarily.
LOCK
LOCK
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
Set Password
●
●
Set Password
Off
: Off
: Off
Lock System
Lock System
On
●
●
●
Block Programme
●
●
●
Block Programme
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Input Block
: Off
Input Block
: Off
●
Key Lock
●
Key Lock
1
2
3
4
Select LOCK.
• If you forget your password, press ‘0’, ‘3’,
‘2’, ‘5’ on the remote control handset.
Select Lock System.
Select On.
Set the password.
Input a 4-digit password.
5
Be sure to remember this number!
Re-enter new password for confirm.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLOCK PROGRAMME
Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.
It is available to use this function in Lock System ”On”.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Page 1/1
C
Favourite Group :
DTV
Programme Edit
RADIO
TV
2
5
8
Nine Digital HD
7 HD Digital
3
6
9
Nine Guide
7 Digital 1
7 Guide
1
4
7
Nine Digital
7 Digital
LOCK
Move
OK
●
●
Set Password
7 Digital3
7 Digital2
Lock System
: On
▲
▼
●
●
●
Block Programme
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Input Block
: Off
●
Key Lock
P
Pr. Change
Page Change
Block/Unblock
Navigation
Previous
or
Page 1/1
C
Favourite Group :
Programme Edit
Cable DTV
Cable Radio
Cable TV
2
5
8
Nine Digital HD
7 HD Digital
3
6
9
Nine Guide
7 Digital 1
7 Guide
1
4
7
Nine Digital
7 Digital
7 Digital3
7 Digital2
P
Pr. Change
Page Change
Block/Unblock
Navigation
Previous
1
2
3
4
5
Select LOCK.
Select Lock System.
Select Block Programme.
Enter the Block Programme.
Select a programme to be locked.
YELLOW
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal
has incorrect information, this function does not operate.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.
Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Rating differs by country.
LOCK
LOCK
Move
OK
Blocking Off : Permits all
Programmes for 18 and above will
●
●
Set Password
●
●
Set Password
programmes
be blocked
▲
▲
Lock System
: On
Block Programme
Lock System
: On
Block Program
12 and above
12 and above
13 and above
14 and above
15 and above
16 and above
17 and above
●
●
▲
▼
13 and above
Parental Guida
●
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
●
●
●
14 and above
Input Block
: Off
Input Block
15 and above
: Off
●
Key Lock
●
Key Lock
16 and above
17 and above
18 and above
18 and above
Blocking Off
(Except for France)
(Only France)
1
2
3
4
Select LOCK.
Select Lock System.
Select Parental Guidance.
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.
It is available to use this function in Lock System ”On”.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
●
●
●
AV1
AV2
◄
►
LOCK
LOCK
Off
Off
Off
Move
OK
●
●
Set Password
●
●
Set Password
Component
Lock System
: On
Lock System
: On
●
●
●
Block Programme
●
●
●
Block Progra
RGB
●
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Parental Guid
●
●
●
●
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
▲
▼
Input Block
: Off
Input Block
: Off
●
Key Lock
●
Key Lock
Close
1
2
3
4
Select LOCK.
Select Lock System.
Select Input Block.
Select input source.
5
Select On or Off.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
KEY LOCK
This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls, so
that it can only be used with the remote control.
This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off.
LOCK
LOCK
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
Set Password
Lock System
●
●
Set Password
Lock System
: Off
: Off
●
●
●
Block Programme
●
●
●
Block Programme
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Input Block
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off
Input Block
Off
●
Key Lock
: Off
●
Key Lock
: Off
●
On
1
2
3
•
In Key Lock ‘On’, if the TV is turned off, press the
Select LOCK.
/ I, INPUT, P
button on the TV or POWER
INPUT, P
or NUMBER buttons on the remote
control then the set will be turned on.
Select Key Lock.
Select On or Off.
• With the Key Lock On, the display ‘
Key
Lock On ’ appears on the screen if any button on
the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV.
• When another OSD is displayed, ‘
Key Lock
On ’ will not operate.
• Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELETEXT
(Image shown may
differ from your TV.)
This feature is not available in all countries.
Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up-to-the-
minute information on news, weather, television programmes, share prices and
many other topics.
The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT
systems. SIMPLE (standard teletext) consists of a number of pages which are
selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and
FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of
teletext information.
SWITCH ON/OFF
Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext. The initial page or last page
viewed appears on the screen.
Two page numbers, TV station name, date and time are displayed on the
screen headline. The first page number indicates your selection, while the sec-
ond shows the current page displayed.
Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext. The previous mode reappears.
SIMPLE TEXT
■ Page selection
Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selec-
tion you press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the
correct page number.
1
2 The P
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELETEXT
TOP TEXT
The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow
field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block.
■ Block / group / page selection
1
With the blue button you can progress from block to block.
2
Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block.
3
With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next
group.
Alternatively the P button can be used.
4
The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P button can be used.
■ Direct page selection
As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using
the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode.
FASTEXT
The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the
corresponding coloured button.
■ Page selection
1
Press the T.OPT button and then use
button to select
menu. Display the index page.
2
3
4
You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding
coloured buttons.
AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with
the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.
The P
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
■ Press the T. OPT button and then use
button to select the Text Option menu.
■ In UK(In digital mode), T. OPT button does not work.
Text Option
Index
Time
■ Index
Select the each index page.
Hold
Reveal
Update
■ Time
Close
When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right
hand corner of the screen.
In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is displayed at
< >
the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the RED/GREEN, or NUMBER buttons.
■ Hold
Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages.
The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the
time. When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the
screen and the automatic page change is inactive.
■ Reveal
Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.
■ Update
Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at
the top left hand corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to
the page number. Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIGITAL TELETEXT
*This function works in UK, Ireland only.
The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text,
graphics etc.
This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast
digital teletext.
TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE
Press the numeric or P
digital service which broadcasts digital teletext.
button to select a
1
Follow the indications on digital teletext and
move onto the next step by pressing TEXT,
2
OK,
, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE
or NUMBER buttons and etc..
To change digital teletext service, select a dif-
3
ferent service by the numeric or P
button.
TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE
1
Press the numeric or P
certain service which broadcasts digital teletext.
button to select a
Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on
teletext.
2
3
Follow the indications on digital teletext and move
onto the next step by pressing OK,
, RED,
GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and
so on.
Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off
digital teletext and return to TV viewing.
4
Some services may allow you to access text ser-
vices by pressing the RED button.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
The TV does not operate properly.
■ Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote con-
trol causing an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control
directly at the TV.
The remote control
does not work
■ Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
■ Install new batteries.
■ Is the sleep timer set?
Power is suddenly
turned off
■ Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted.
■ If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off auto-
matically after 15 minutes.
The video function does not work.
■ Check whether the TV is switched on.
■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
No picture & No sound ■ Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains?
■ Check your antenna direction and/or location.
■ Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet.
Picture appears slowly
after switching on
■ This is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact
your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes.
■ Adjust Colour in menu option.
■ Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR.
■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■ Are the video cables installed properly?
No or poor colour
or poor picture
■ Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking
■ Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool.
■ Station or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station.
■ Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations.
■ Check for sources of possible interference.
Poor reception on
some channels
Lines or streaks
in pictures
■ Check antenna (Change the position of the antenna).
No picture
■ Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable.
If the HDMI cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering or no screen display
can result. Please use the High Speed HDMI Cable.
when connecting
HDMI
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
The audio function does not work.
■ Press the
+ or - button.
Picture OK & No
sound
■ Sound muted? Press MUTE button.
■ Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
■ Are the audio cables installed properly?
No output from one
of the speakers
■ Adjust Balance in menu option.
Unusual sound from ■ A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise
inside the TV
when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV.
■ Check HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable
■ Check USB cable over version 2.0.
.
No sound when con-
necting HDMI or USB
*This feature is not available for all models.
There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied)
The signal is out of
■ Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency.
■ Check the input source.
range
(Invalid format)
Vertical bar or stripe on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
■ Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option)
Screen colour is
unstable or single
colour
■ Check the signal cable.
■ Reinstall the PC video card.
There is a problem with PICTURE settings.
When the user chang-
es the picture settings, ■ It means that the TV is currently set to Store Demo mode.
the TV automatically
converts back to the
initial settings after a
certain period of time.
To switch to Home use mode you should do the followings:
From the TV Menu, choose OPTION -> Choose Mode Setting -> Choose
Home use. Now, you have completed switching to the Home use mode.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.
Cleaning the Screen
A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of luke-
warm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
1
Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate
before switching on.
2
Cleaning the Cabinet
■ To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
■ Do not to use a wet cloth.
Extended Absence
CAUTION
► If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power cord to
protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
32LE5
***
MODELS
32LE5500-ZA / 32LE550N-ZA
32LE5800-ZA / 32LE5900-ZA
32LE5510-ZB / 32LE551N-ZB
32LE5810-ZB / 32LE5910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
12.7 kg
10.5 kg
12.7 kg
10.5 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
37LE5
***
MODELS
37LE5500-ZA / 37LE550N-ZA
37LE5800-ZA / 37LE5900-ZA
37LE5510-ZB / 37LE551N-ZB
37LE5810-ZB / 37LE5910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
905.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm
905.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 39.9 mm
905.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm
905.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
15.6 kg
12.8 kg
15.6 kg
12.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42LE5
***
MODELS
42LE5500-ZA / 42LE550N-ZA
42LE5800-ZA / 42LE5900-ZA
42LE5510-ZB / 42LE551N-ZB
42LE5810-ZB / 42LE5910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
47LE5
***
MODELS
47LE5500-ZA / 47LE550N-ZA
47LE5800-ZA / 47LE5900-ZA
47LE5510-ZB / 47LE5 51N-ZB
47LE5810-ZB / 47LE5910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
55LE5
***
MODELS
55LE5500-ZA / 55LE550N-ZA
55LE5800-ZA / 55LE5900-ZA
55LE5510-ZB / 55LE551N-ZB
55LE5810-ZB / 55LE5910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
34.5 kg
28.8 kg
34.5 kg
28.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
42LX6
***
47LX6
***
MODELS
42LX6500-ZD / 42LX650N-ZD
42LX6800-ZD / 42LX6900-ZD
47LX6500-ZD / 47LX650N-ZD
47LX6800-ZD / 47LX6900-ZD
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
19.5 kg
16.7 kg
22.9 kg
19.6 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
160 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
180 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32LE7
***
MODELS
32LE7500-ZA / 32LE750N-ZA
32LE7800-ZA / 32LE7900-ZA
32LE7510-ZB / 32LE751N-ZB
32LE7810-ZB / 32LE7910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
786.4 mm x 556.2 mm x 221.0 mm
786.4 mm x 500.4 mm x 39.9 mm
786.4 mm x 556.2 mm x 221.0 mm
786.4 mm x 500.4 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
14.8 kg
11.7 kg
14.8 kg
11.7 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
37LE7
***
MODELS
37LE7500-ZA / 37LE750N-ZA
37LE7800-ZA / 37LE7900-ZA
37LE7510-ZB / 37LE751N-ZB
37LE7810-ZB / 37LE7910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
907.4 mm x 628.3 mm x 269.8 mm
907.4 mm x 569.0 mm x 39.9 mm
907.4 mm x 628.3 mm x 269.8 mm
907.4 mm x 569.0 mm x 39.9 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
18.8 kg
14.7 kg
18.8 kg
14.7 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
42LE7
***
42LE7500-ZA /
42LE750N-ZA /
42LE7800-ZA /
42LE7900-ZA
42LE7510-ZB /
42LE751N-ZB /
42LE7810-ZB /
42LE7910-ZB
42LE7300-ZA /
42LE730N-ZA /
42LE7380-ZA /
42LE7390-ZA
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1018.2 mm x 692.5 mm x 269.8 mm 1018.2 mm x 692.5 mm x 269.8 mm
1009.2 mm x 694.5 mm x 286.5 mm
1009.2 mm x 629.7 mm x 29.3 mm
with stand
1018.2 mm x 630.7 mm x 29.3 mm
1018.2 mm x 630.7 mm x 29.3 mm
without stand
with stand
23.2 kg
19.1 kg
23.2 kg
19.1 kg
25.5 kg
21.0 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
47LE7
***
47LE7500-ZA /
47LE750N-ZA /
47LE7800-ZA /
47LE7900-ZA
47LE7510-ZB /
47LE751N-ZB /
47LE7810-ZB /
47LE7910-ZB
47LE7300-ZA /
47LE730N-ZA /
47LE7380-ZA /
47LE7390-ZA
MODELS
Dimensions
1128.6 mm x 758.5 mm x 284.4 mm 1128.6 mm x 758.5 mm x 284.4 mm
1119.6 mm x 757.1 mm x 286.5 mm
with stand
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1128.6 mm x 693.3 mm x 29.8 mm
1128.6 mm x 693.3 mm x 29.8 mm
1119.6 mm x 691.3 mm x 29.3 mm
without stand
with stand
27.5 kg
23.0 kg
27.5 kg
23.0 kg
29.7 kg
25.2 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55LE7
***
MODELS
55LE7500-ZA / 55LE750N-ZA
55LE7800-ZA / 55LE7900-ZA
55LE7510-ZB / 55LE751N-ZB
55LE7810-ZB / 55LE7910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1306.0 mm x 868.1 mm x 328.0 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.4 mm x 31.2 mm
1306.0 mm x 868.1 mm x 328.0 mm
1306.0 mm x 797.4 mm x 31.2 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
39.6 kg
33.5 kg
39.6 kg
33.5 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
200 W
47LX9
***
55LX9
***
MODELS
47LX9800-ZA
55LX9800-ZA
Dimensions
1085.9 mm x 710.6 mm x 255.0 mm
1255.8 mm x 805.0 mm x 255.0 mm
with stand
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1085.9 mm x 654.2 mm x 31.6 mm
1255.8 mm x 749.6 mm x 31.6 mm
without stand
with stand
26.7 kg
22.1 kg
32.7 kg
28.1 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
260 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
42LE8
***
MODELS
42LE8500-ZA / 42LE850N-ZA
42LE8800-ZA / 42LE8900-ZA
42LE8510-ZB / 42LE851N-ZB
42LE8810-ZB / 42LE8910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1013.3 mm x 705.8 mm x 235.5 mm
1013.3 mm x 645.8 mm x 34.5 mm
1013.3 mm x 705.8 mm x 235.5 mm
1013.3 mm x 645.8 mm x 34.5 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
27.2 kg
23.1 kg
27.2 kg
23.1 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
160 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
160 W
47LE8
***
MODELS
47LE8500-ZA / 47LE850N-ZA
47LE8800-ZA / 47LE8900-ZA
47LE8510-ZB / 47LE851N-ZB
47LE8810-ZB / 47LE8910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1122.6 mm x 769.3 mm x 275.0 mm
1122.6 mm x 707.3 mm x 34.5 mm
1122.6 mm x 769.3 mm x 275.0 mm
1122.6 mm x 707.3 mm x 34.5 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
31.6 kg
27.0 kg
31.6 kg
27.0 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55LE8
***
MODELS
55LE8500-ZA / 55LE850N-ZA
55LE8800-ZA / 55LE8900-ZA
55LE8510-ZB / 55LE851N-ZB
55LE8810-ZB / 55LE8910-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1292.6 mm x 875.4 mm x 311.9 mm
1292.6 mm x 802.9 mm x 34.5 mm
1292.6 mm x 875.4 mm x 311.9 mm
1292.6 mm x 802.9 mm x 34.5 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
43.8 kg
35.8 kg
43.8 kg
35.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
230 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
230 W
32LD4
***
37LD4
***
MODELS
32LD480-ZB
32LD490-ZB
37LD480-ZB
37LD490-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
799.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm
with stand
799.0 mm x 506.0 mm x 73.5 mm
916.0 mm x 575.0 mm x 77.4 mm
without stand
with stand
9.1 kg
8.1 kg
12.5 kg
10.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
120 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
160 W
42LD4
***
MODELS
42LD480-ZB
42LD490-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1023.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 261.0 mm
1023.0 mm x 635.0 mm x 76.6 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
15.1 kg
13.5 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
190 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
32LD6
***
MODELS
32LD650-ZC / 32LD650N-ZC
32LD680-ZC / 32LD690-ZB
32LD651-ZB / 32LD651N-ZB
32LD681-ZB / 32LD691-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
797.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm
797.0 mm x 495.0 mm x 73.8 mm
797.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm
797.0 mm x 495.0 mm x 73.8 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
9.8 kg
8.7 kg
9.8 kg
8.7 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
37LD6
***
MODELS
37LD650-ZC / 37LD650N-ZC
37LD680-ZC / 37LD690-ZB
37LD651-ZB / 37LD651N-ZB
37LD681-ZB / 37LD691-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm
916.0 mm x 560.0 mm x 77.7 mm
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm
916.0 mm x 560.0 mm x 77.7 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
12.8 kg
11.2 kg
12.8 kg
11.2 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42LD6
***
MODELS
42LD650-ZC / 42LD650N-ZC
42LD680-ZC / 42LD690-ZB
42LD651-ZB / 42LD651N-ZB
42LD681-ZB / 42LD691-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1024.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 261.0 mm
1024.0 mm x 621.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1024.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 261.0 mm
1024.0 mm x 621.0 mm x 76.8 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
15.5 kg
13.9 kg
15.5 kg
13.9 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
47LD6
***
MODELS
47LD650-ZC / 47LD650N-ZC
47LD680-ZC / 47LD690-ZB
47LD651-ZB / 47LD651N-ZB
47LD681-ZB / 47LD691-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 76.8 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
20.3 kg
18.3 kg
20.3 kg
18.3 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
55LD6
***
MODELS
55LD650-ZC / 55LD650N-ZC
55LD680-ZC / 55LD690-ZB
55LD651-ZB / 55LD651N-ZB
55LD681-ZB / 55LD691-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm x 330.0 mm
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm x 96.5 mm
1329.0 mm x 872.0 mm x 330.0 mm
1329.0 mm x 796.0 mm x 96.5 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
33.0 kg
29.8 kg
33.0 kg
29.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
340 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
340 W
32LE4
***
37LE4
***
MODELS
32LE4800-ZB
32LE4900-ZB
37LE4800-ZB
37LE4900-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
786.0 mm x 559.0 mm x 221.0 mm
907.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm
with stand
786.0 mm x 500.0 mm x 39.9 mm
907.0 mm x 565.0 mm x 39.9 mm
without stand
with stand
12.4 kg
10.6 kg
14.6 kg
12.1 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
130 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
140 W
42LE4
***
MODELS
42LE4800-ZB
42LE4900-ZB
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1018.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm
1018.0 mm x 627.0 mm x 29.8 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
17.0 kg
14.5 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32LD7
***
MODELS
32LD750-ZA / 32LD750N-ZA
32LD780-ZA / 32LD790-ZA
32LD751-ZB / 32LD751N-ZB
32LD781-ZB / 32LD791-ZB / 32LD752-ZD
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
804.0 mm x 567.0 mm x 212.0 mm
804.0 mm x 510.0 mm x 73.8 mm
804.0 mm x 567.0 mm x 212.0 mm
with stand
804.0 mm x 510.0 mm x 73.8 mm
without stand
with stand
10.2 kg
8.8 kg
10.2 kg
8.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
42LD7
***
MODELS
42LD750-ZA / 42LD750N-ZA
42LD780-ZA / 42LD790-ZA
42LD751-ZB / 42LD751N-ZB
42LD781-ZB / 42LD791-ZB / 42LD752-ZD
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1032.0 mm x 700.0 mm x 260.0 mm
1032.0 mm x 639.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1032.0 mm x 700.0 mm x 260.0 mm
with stand
1032.0 mm x 639.0 mm x 76.8 mm
without stand
with stand
16.5 kg
13.8 kg
16.5 kg
13.8 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
47LD7
***
MODELS
47LD750-ZA / 47LD750N-ZA
47LD780-ZA / 47LD790-ZA
47LD751-ZB / 47LD751N-ZB
47LD781-ZB / 47LD791-ZB / 47LD752-ZD
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1144.0 mm x 764.0 mm x 260.0 mm
1144.0 mm x 704.0 mm x 76.8 mm
1144.0 mm x 764.0 mm x 260.0 mm
with stand
1144.0 mm x 704.0 mm x 76.8 mm
without stand
with stand
20.9 kg
18.2 kg
20.9 kg
18.2 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
250 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32LD8
***
MODELS
32LD840-ZA / 32LD840N-ZA
32LD880-ZA / 32LD890-ZA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
803.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 212.0 mm
803.0 mm x 502.0 mm x 73.4 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
10.0 kg
8.6 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
37LD8
***
MODELS
37LD840-ZA / 37LD840N-ZA
37LD880-ZA / 37LD890-ZA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
922.0 mm x 640.0 mm x 260.0 mm
922.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 77.3 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
13.9 kg
11.3 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
170 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
42LD8
***
MODELS
42LD840-ZA / 42LD840N-ZA
42LD880-ZA / 42LD890-ZA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1030.0 mm x 701.0 mm x 260.0 mm
1030.0 mm x 628.0 mm x 76.4 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
16.5 kg
13.9 kg
Weight
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50PK5
**
60PK5
**
MODELS
50PK590-ZE
60PK590-ZE
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1171.4 mm x 786.2 mm x 309.7 mm
1171.4 mm x 724.4 mm x 55.3 mm
1392.0 mm x 915.0 mm x 384.0 mm
1392.0 mm x 852.0 mm x 55.3 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
31.0 kg
28.6 kg
45.9 kg
41.4 kg
Weight
without stand
50PK7
***
60PK7
***
MODELS
50PK760-ZC / 50PK760N-ZC
50PK780-ZC / 50PK790-ZC
60PK760-ZC / 60PK760N-ZC
60PK780-ZC / 60PK790-ZC
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1184.0 mm x 801.0 mm x 294.5 mm
1184.0 mm x 738.5 mm x 52.4 mm
1402.8 mm x 934.3 mm x 384.0 mm
1402.8 mm x 866.8 mm x 52.4 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
34.5 kg
29.9 kg
50.3 kg
42.7 kg
Weight
without stand
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
■ For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
50PK9
***
60PK9
***
MODELS
50PK950-ZA / 50PK960-ZA
50PK950N-ZA / 50PK980-ZA
50PK990-ZA
60PK950-ZA / 60PK960-ZA
60PK950N-ZA / 60PK980-ZA
60PK990-ZA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1190.0 mm x 804.5 mm x 294.5 mm
1190.0 mm x 737.0 mm x 52.4 mm
1408.8 mm x 937.9 mm x 384.0 mm
1408.8 mm x 860.7 mm x 52.4 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
34.8 kg
30.2 kg
50.9 kg
43.3 kg
Weight
without stand
50PX9
***
60PX9
***
MODELS
50PX960-ZA / 50PX950N-ZA /
50PX980-ZA / 50PX990-ZA
60PX960-ZA / 60PX950N-ZA /
60PX980-ZA / 60PX990-ZA
Dimensions
(Width x Height x
Depth)
1190.0 mm x 804.5 mm x 294.5 mm
1190.0 mm x 737.0 mm x 52.4 mm
1408.8 mm x 937.9 mm x 384.0 mm
1408.8 mm x 860.7 mm x 52.4 mm
with stand
without stand
with stand
34.8 kg
30.2 kg
50.9 kg
43.3 kg
Weight
without stand
CI Module Size
(Width x Height x Depth)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating
0 °C to 40 °C
Temperature
Less than 80 %
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
Environment condition
-20 °C to 60° C
Less than 85 %
Supported movie files
Refer to p. 96 to 97
■ For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
Digital TV
Analogue TV
PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II,
SECAM L/L
DVB-T
DVB-C
Television System
’
VHF: E2 to E12, UHF: E21 to E69,
Programme Coverage
VHF, UHF
CATV: S1 to S20, HYPER: S21 to S47
Maximum number of storable programmes
External Antenna Impedance
1,000
75 Ω
75 Ω
■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IR CODES
*This feature is not available for all models.
Code (Hexa)
Function
Energy Saving
POWER
INPUT
Note
R/C BUTTON
95
08
0B
79
F0
45
43
AB
40
R/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF)
R/C BUTTON
RATIO
R/C BUTTON
TV/RAD
Q.MENU
MENU
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
GUIDE
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
Up (
)
41
07
06
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
Down (
Left (
)
)
Right (
)
44
28
5B
AA
30
02
03
1E
09
00
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
OK( )
BACK
EXIT
INFO i
AV MODE
+
-
FAV (MARK) (CHAR/NUM)
MUTE (DELETE)
P
01
10 to 19
53
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
P
Number Key 0 to 9
LIST
1A
Q.VIEW
72
RED Key
71
GREEN Key
YELLOW Key
BLUE Key(L/R SELECT)
TEXT
63
61
20
21
T.OPT(T.Option)
SUBTITLE
SIMPLINK
AD
39
7E
91
B1
▀
B0
►
BA
8F
l l (FREEZE:Plasma TV only)
◄◄
►►
NetCast
@
8E
59
58
201
DC
3D
R/C BUTTON
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Setup
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an
external control device (such as a computer or an
A/V control system) to control the product’s func-
tions externally.
Connect the serial port of the control device to the
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.
Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied
with the product.
Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male
No. Pin Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No connection
1
6
5
9
(
)
)
RXD Receive data
(
TXD Transmit data
(
)
DTR DTE side ready
GND
(
)
DSR DCE side ready
(
)
RTS Ready to send
(
)
CTS Clear to send
No Connection
RS-232C Configurations
(
)
3-Wire Configurations Not standard
(
)
7-Wire Configurations Standard RS-232C cable
PC
TV
PC
TV
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
8
7
TXD
RXD
GND
DSR
DTR
CTS
RTS
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set ID
Use this function to specify a set ID number.
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’.
p.207
►
OPTION
OPTION
Move
OK
Move
OK
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
●
●
●
●
●
Language(Language)
Country
: UK
Country
: UK
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
Disability Assistance
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
◄
►
1
●
Set ID
:1
●
Set ID
:1
●
Mode Setting
: Home Use
●
Mode Setting
: Ho
Close
1
2
3
Select OPTION.
Select Set ID.
Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number.
The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to 99.
• Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Communication Parameters
(
)
■ Baud rate : 9600 bps UART
■ Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
■ Data length : 8 bits
■ Parity : None
■ Stop bit : 1 bit
■ Communication code : ASCII code
Transmission / Receiving Protocol
Transmission
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Command Reference List
[Command 1] : First command to control the TV.
(j, k, m or x)
*
COMMAND COMMAND
DATA
(Hexadecimal)
1
2
[Command 2] : Second command to control the TV.
*
*
[Set ID]
: You can adjust the set ID to choose
desired monitor ID number in option
menu. Adjustment range is 1 to 99.
When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every con-
nected set is controlled.
01. Power
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
x
j
a
c
d
e
f
00 to 01
Refer to p. 205
Refer to p. 205
00 to 01
02. Aspect Ratio
03. Screen Mute
04. Volume Mute
05. Volume Control
06. Contrast
Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to99)
on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0 to
0x63) on transmission/receiving proto-
col.
00 to 64
g
h
i
00 to 64
07. Brightness
00 to 64
08. Colour
00 to 64
[DATA]
: To transmit command data.
Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of com-
mand.
*
09. Tint
j
00 to 64
10. Sharpness
k
l
00 to 64
[Cr]
[ ]
: Carriage Return
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
: ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
*
*
11. OSD Select
12. Remote control lock mode
13. Treble
00 to 01
m
r
00 to 01
00 to 64
14. Bass
s
t
00 to 64
OK Acknowledgement
15. Balance
00 to 64
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
16. Colour Temperature
17. ISM Method
18. Energy Saving
19. Auto Configuration
20. Tune Command
21. Programme Add/Skip
22. Key
u
p
q
u
a
b
c
g
b
00 to 64
Refer to p. 207
00 to 05
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving normal data. At this
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates
present status data. If the data is data write mode,
it returns the data of the PC computer.
j
j
01
m
m
m
m
x
Refer to p. 207
00 to 01
Key Code
00 to 64
Error Acknowledgement
23. Control Back Light
24. Input select (Main)
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
Refer to p. 208
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based
on this format when receiving abnormal data from
non-viable functions or communication errors.
* Note : During USB operations such as DivX or EMF, all
commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not exe-
cuted and treated as NG.
Data 00: Illegal Code
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01. Power (Command: k a)
04. Volume Mute (Command: k e)
► To control Power On/Off of the set.
Transmission
► To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Transmission
Data 00 : Power Off
01 : Power On
[k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off)
01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
► To show Power On/Off.
Transmission
[e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
05. Volume Control (Command: k f)
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]
Ack
► To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME but-
tons on remote control.
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data
based on this format, Acknowledgement data feed
back presents status about each function.
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may dis-
play on the screen when TV is power On.
Transmission
[k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Ack
02. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c) (Main Picture Size)
[f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
► To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format)
You can also adjust the screen format using the
Aspect Ratio in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.
06. Contrast (Command: k g)
► To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Transmission
[k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3)
02 : Wide screen (16:9)
04 : Zoom
07 : 14:9
09 : Just Scan
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
0B : Full Wide
10 to1F : Cinema Zoom 1 to16
*
06 : Original
Ack
Ack
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
07. Brightness (Command: k h)
* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3
screen aspect ratio.
► To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.
In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50Hz /
60 Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz),
Component( 720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
mode, Just Scan is available.
*
Transmission
[k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Full Wide is supported only for Digital, Analogue
AV.
03. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
,
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Ack
► To select screen mute on/off.
[h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Transmission
08. Colour (Command: k i)
► To adjust the screen colour.
[k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Screen mute off (Picture on)
Video mute off
You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
01 : Screen mute on (Picture off)
10 : Video mute on
[k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Ack
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
[d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
[i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On
Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute
on, TV will not display OSD.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
09. Tint (Command: k j)
13. Treble (Command: k r)
► To adjust the screen tint.
► To adjust treble.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
Transmission
[k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Red : 00 to Green : 64
[k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Ack
Ack
[j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
14. Bass (Command: k s)
10. Sharpness (Command: k k)
► To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.
► To adjust the screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
Transmission
[k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
[k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Ack
Ack
[k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Balance (Command: k t)
► To adjust balance.
11. OSD Select (Command: k l)
► To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when con-
trolling remotely.
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
[k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Transmission
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
[k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Ack
Data 00 : OSD off
01 : OSD on
[t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
[l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
16. Colour Temperature (Command: x u)
12. Remote control lock mode (Command: k m)
► To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour
Temperature in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
► To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and
remote control.
Transmission
[x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
[k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 207.
*
Data 00 : Lock off
01 : Lock on
Ack
Ack
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* If you are not using the remote control, use this
mode.
When main power is on/off, external control lock is
released.
* In the standby mode, if key lock is on, TV will not
turn on by power on key of IR & Local Key.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17. ISM Method (Command: j p) (Plasma TV only)
20. Tune Command (Command: m a)
► To control the ISM method. You can also adjust ISM
Method in OPTION menu.
► Select channel to following physical number.
Transmission
Transmission
[m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr]
[j][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : High channel data
Data01 : Low channel data
ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)
No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH),
DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care
Data02 : 0x00 : Analogue Main
0x10 : DTV Main
Data 02: Orbiter
04: White wash
08: Normal
20: Colour Wash
0x20 : Radio
Ack
Channel data range
[p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: 63 (0 to 99)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 3E7 (0 to 999)
(Except For Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark,
Ireland)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 270F (0 to 9999)
(Only Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland)
18. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
► To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can
Ack
PICTURE
also adjust Energy Saving in
menu.
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data Min: 00 to Max: 7DH
Transmission
[j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Power Saving
Function
Level
Description
7
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
21. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)
Low Power
Low Power
Low Power
Low Power
Off
► To set skip status for the current Programme.
Transmission
Minimum
Medium
Maximum
[m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Skip
01 : Add
Auto
(LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only)
Ack
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Low Power
Low Power
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Screen Off
Real data mapping 1
*
Intelligent
Sensor
00 : Step 0
0
0
0
0
Low Power
0
1
0
0
(Plasma TV
only)
A : Step 10 (Set ID 10)
Ack
F : Step 15 (Set ID 15)
10 : Step 16 (Set ID 16)
[q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
64 : Step 100
6E : Step 110
19. Auto Configure(Command: j u)
► To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking
automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.
Transmission
73 : Step 115
74 : Step 116
[j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: To set
Ack
CF : Step 199
FE : Step 254
FF : Step 255
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
22. Key(Command: m c)
24. Input select (Command: x b)
(Main Picture Input)
► To send IR remote key code.
Transmission
► To select input source for main picture.
Transmission
[m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Structure
Data Key code - Refer to page 201.
Ack
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
MSB
0
LSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
External Input
Input Number
External Input
Data
DTV
23. Control Back Light (Command: m g)
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Analogue
AV
► To Control the back light.
Transmission
Component
RGB
[m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data : data Min: 00 to Max: 64
Ack
HDMI
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Input Number
Data
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input1
Input2
Input3
Input4
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE
The following GPL executables and LGPL, MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the
GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:
GPL EXECUTABLES:
Linux kernel 2.6, busybox, e2fsprogs, jfsutils, lzo, msdl-1.1, mtd-utils, ntpclient, procps
LGPL LIBRARIES:
Atk, cairo, directFB, ffmpeg, glib, GnuTLS, gtk+, iconv, libintl, libgcrypt, libgpg-error, libsoup, libusb,
pango, uClibc, webkit
MPL LIBRARIES:
Nanox, spidermonkey
LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request
to LG Electronics : [email protected]
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by
LG Electronics.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL, MPL licenses on the CD-ROM provided with this product.
Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/gpl-2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.
This product includes other open source software.
■ boost C++: software developed by http://www.boost.org distributed under the Boost Software
License, Version 1.0
■ c-ares : copyright © 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
■ expat:
• copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
• copyright © 2001-2007 Expat maintainers.
■ fontconfig: copyright © 2001, 2003 Keith Packard
■ freetype: copyright © 2003 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org).
■ ICU: copyright © 1995-2008 International Business Machines Corporation and others.
■ libcurl: copyright © 1996 - 2008, Daniel Stenberg.
■ libjpeg: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright ©
1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane.
■ libmng: copyright © 2000-2007 Gerard Juyn, Glenn Randers-Pehrson
■ libpng: copyright © 1998-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
■ libupnp: copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
■ libxml2 : copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard
■ libxslt: copyright © 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard
■ lua interpreter: copyright © 1994–2008 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
■ md5: copyright © 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc
■ openSSL:
• cryptographic software written by Eric Young.
• software written by Tim Hudson.
• software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org)
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
■ pixman:
• copyright © 1987, 1988, 1989, 1998 The Open Group
• copyright © 1987, 1988, 1989 Digital Equipment Corporation
• copyright © 1999, 2004, 2008 Keith Packard
• copyright © 2000 SuSE, Inc.
• copyright © 2000 Keith Packard, member of The XFree86 Project, Inc.
• copyright © 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
• copyright © 2004 Nicholas Miell
• copyright © 2005 Lars Knoll & Zack Rusin, Trolltech
• copyright © 2005 Trolltech AS
• copyright © 2007 Luca Barbato
• copyright © 2008 Aaron Plattner, NVIDIA Corporation
• copyright © 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera
• copyright © 2008 André Tupinambá
• copyright © 2008 Mozilla Corporation
• copyright © 2008 Frederic Plourde
■ portmap: copyright © 1983,1991 The Regents of the University of California.
■ tiff: copyright © 1987, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
■ tinyxml: copyright © 2000-2006 Lee Thomason
■ xyssl:
• copyright © 2006-2008 Christophe Devine
• copyright © 2009 Paul Bakker
zlib: copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includ-
ing without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-
ject to the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to sur-
render the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software,
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no war-
ranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors
of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program
or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that
is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is
addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, pro-
vided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in
exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running
for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copy-
right notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:
if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regard-
less of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on
the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or exe-
cutable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface defini-
tion files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special excep-
tion, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will
not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permis-
sion to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not
accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indi-
cate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-
ditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to sat-
isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the sec-
tion is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems
or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO
WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compil-
ers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest
you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom
of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license,
the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free
programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits
more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library,
so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified ver-
sion of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the differ-
ence between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from
the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public
License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with applica-
tion programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether
that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medi-
um, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and dis-
claimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distrib-
ute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection
in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regard-
less of who wrote it.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other
change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or execut-
able form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being
compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore cov-
ered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.
The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and
small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it
is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under
Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with
the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modi-
fications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copy-
right notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normal-
ly accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in
an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that
you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automati-
cally terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permis-
sion to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condi-
tions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-
ditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to sat-
isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the sec-
tion is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical dis-
tribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new prob-
lems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two
goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer
to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
---------------
1. Definitions.
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development com-
munity for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the ini-
tial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or
any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already
Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation,
method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation
of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known,
available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form,
provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the
terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You.
For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or manage-
ment of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the out-
standing shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intel-
lectual property claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use,
reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use,
practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes
Original Code under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the
Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the
Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, repro-
duce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or por-
tions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a
Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor
either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use,
sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or por-
tions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has delet-
ed from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i)
third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor
with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of
this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this
License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source
Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under
the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic
Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via
Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially
became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available
even if the
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification
is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in
which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise
the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the
Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient
detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is
made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or
newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has
been obtained.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of
patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this infor-
mation in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that
Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a
particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant
directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s)
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to
Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations
to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of
the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liabil-
ity obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or lia-
bility terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for
that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is avail-
able under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of
Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documenta-
tion or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms
different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license
for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from
the rights set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any
terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this
License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements
of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered
Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the max-
imum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in
the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to
the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from
time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use
it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subse-
quent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms
applicable to Covered Code created under this License.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is
not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases
"Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in
your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your ver-
sion of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling
in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of
themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE
COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-
INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL
DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms here-
in and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered
Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature,
must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against
Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred
to as "Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted
by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay
Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If
within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by
the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or
2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are
revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that
Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the
initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distrib-
utors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall
survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK
STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH
LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48
C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License
is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This
License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise),
excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity
chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara
County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed
against the drafter shall not apply to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, direct-
ly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and
Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to
constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means
that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alter-
native licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file
under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other
provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of
this file under either the MPL or the [___] License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the
Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for
Your Modifications.]
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Record the model number and serial number of
the TV.
Refer to the label on the back cover and quote
this information to your dealer when requiring
any service.
Model :
Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Serial No. :
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|